2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual

2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ........ 4-2
Rear Seats ............................................... 1-8 Towing ................................................... 4-45
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-31 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-62 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-75 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-47
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-48
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8 Front Axle ............................................... 5-49
Windows ................................................. 2-13 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-50
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-55
Starting and Operating Tires ...................................................... 5-57
Your Vehicle ........................................ 2-18 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-95
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38 Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-104
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-42 Electrical System .................................... 5-104
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-44 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-109
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-19 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-23 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-39 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-44 Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French language copy of this manual
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,

CHEVROLET, and the CHEVROLET Emblem are How to Use This Manual
registered trademarks and the name COLORADO is Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to
a trademark of General Motors Corporation. end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
This manual includes the latest information at the time this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find that pictures
after that time without further notice. For vehicles and words work together to explain things.
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division Index
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it the manual, and the page number where you will find it.
so the new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A. © Copyright General Motors Corporation 10/06/03

Part No. C2440 A First Edition All Rights Reserved
ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also find a
circle with a slash
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We through it in this book.
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things This safety symbol means
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. “Don’t,” “Don’t do this”
or “Don’t let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
Notice: These mean there is something that could are shown along with the text describing the operation
damage your vehicle. or information relating to a specific component, control,
A notice will tell you about something that can damage message, gage or indicator.
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. component, gage or indicator, reference the following
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid topics:
the damage.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different • Features and Controls in Section 2
words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use • Climate Controls in Section 3
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3 Child Restraints .............................................1-31
Manual Seats ................................................1-3 Older Children ..............................................1-31
Power Seats ..................................................1-4 Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Heated Seats .................................................1-5 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5 Top Strap ....................................................1-42
Head Restraints .............................................1-7 Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-44
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-46
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ......................1-8
Designed for the LATCH System
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ...............1-10
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch) .............1-48
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10 the LATCH System (Models without
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15 an Air Bag Off Switch) ...............................1-51
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Driver Position ..............................................1-16 Rear Seat Position ....................................1-51
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24 Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-53
Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-24 Securing a Child Restraint in
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25 the Right Front Seat Position
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for (Models with an Air Bag Off Switch) .............1-54
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-28 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-30 Right Front Seat Position (Models
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30 without an Air Bag Off Switch) ....................1-58
1-1
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-62 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-74
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-64 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-67 Vehicle ....................................................1-74
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-68
Restraint System Check ..................................1-75
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-68
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-75
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Replacing Restraint System Parts
Inflates? ...................................................1-69
After a Crash ............................................1-75
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-71
1-2
Front Seats
Manual Seats
This section tells you about the seats – how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
seat only when the vehicle is not moving. and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on
the outboard side of the front seat(s). Vertical Control: This control reclines the seatbacks.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5 for more
information.
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, there will be a
knob located on the
outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat

by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control. Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole
control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle.
1-4
Heated Seats Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have reclining seatbacks.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and

lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats
for added comfort. To manually recline your seatback, lift the lever on the
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on outboard side of the seat.
at low heat. Press the upper part of the switch to Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want
turn the heater on at high heat. Put the switch in the it. Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the
center position to turn the heater off. seatback, the seat will go to an upright position.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to If you have power seats, you can use the vertical power
work. The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for seat control to recline the seatback. Move the reclining
the heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat. front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is injuries.
moving. For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-6
Head Restraints If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head
restraints, adjust your head restraint so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Push up on the head restraint to raise it. To lower
the head restraint, press the button located on top of
the seatback and push down on the head restraint.
1-7
Seatback Latches
Your vehicle may be equipped with front seatbacks that {CAUTION:
fold forward to let people get into the rear seat or to
access the storage area behind the seat. If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
To fold the front seatback
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
forward, push the lever on
the side of the seat press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
rearward and pull the locked.
seatback forward.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If
the seatback was reclined before being folded forward,
it will return to the reclined position.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
If your vehicle is a crew cab, the rear seatback can be
folded forward. Before you can fold the rear seatback,
you need to unlatch the center safety belt buckle.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
1. Insert a tool with a small tip into the slot to unlatch
the center position safety belt buckle. Then move
the belt to the side so it is not in the way.
1-8
2. Grasp the loop located
on the side of the
seatback you want to {CAUTION:
fold and pull until
you hear a click. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the

3. Fold the seatback down. following:
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold down the other 1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
seatback.
2. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to the
buckle.
{CAUTION: 3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place by
pushing and pulling on it.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move 4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always the upright, locked position.
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-9
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) Safety Belts
If your vehicle has an Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
extended cab, there may
be a forward folding seat This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
in the rear area. belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
To fold the rear seat down, pull down on the bottom of the things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
seat until the seat is in place. To store the seat, push the You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
entire seat up until it is flush with the trim panel. same crash, you might not be, if you are
The rear seat storage compartments must be in the buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
rearward position before folding the seat down. and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-10
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
{CAUTION: reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo Light on page 3-26.
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
that is not equipped with seats and safety says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
seat and using a safety belt properly. crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
1-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on

wheels.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.
doesn’t stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Questions and Answers About Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Safety Belts
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in
an accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety your control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of home. And the greatest number of serious
of being conscious during and after an accident, injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater than 40 mph (65 km/h).
if you are belted.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have

to wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
systems only; so they work with safety belts – not
instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if
you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to
buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position
This part is only for people of adult size. This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Be aware that there are special things to know about Lap-Shoulder Belt
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-31 it properly.
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow 1. Close and lock the door.
those rules for everyone’s protection.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your how, see “Seats” in the Index.
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-16
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
After you move the adjuster
to where you want it, try to
move it down without
squeezing the release
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on buttons to make sure it
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies has locked into position.
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

nearly as much protection this way.
1-19
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Center Front Passenger Position
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For Lap Belt
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly. If your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat, someone can
sit in the center position.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you

have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-24
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear safety belt comfort guides
for the rear outside positions.
Rear safety belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to attach the comfort guide to the
shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-28
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
over the belt and insert the two edges of the guide on top.
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-29
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe crash in
which the front of the vehicle hits something.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-75.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
shoulder. the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-30
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in a rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have a choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear outside seat position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. See
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and
Small Adults on page 1-28. If the child is sitting in the
center rear seat of a crew cab, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in
a crash the child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-33
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-34
{CAUTION:
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly Children who are up against, or very close to,
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
arms. A baby should be secured in an injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
appropriate restraint. belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support,
Selection of a particular restraint should take including support for the head and neck.
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
and age but also whether or not the restraint will neck is weak and its head weighs so much
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
be used. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
For most basic types of child restraints, there are the restraint, so the crash forces can be
many different models available. When purchasing distributed across the strongest part of an
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will always should be secured in appropriate
have a label saying that it meets federal motor infant restraints.
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a

motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-37
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the seating surface against the back of the infant. the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
The harness system holds the infant in place and, with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-38
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window. are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-39
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child Where to Put the Restraint
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
vehicle safety standards. restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a child in a
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on unless your vehicle has an air bag off switch and the air
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the bag off light shows off. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint air bag is off. Here is why:
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
1-40
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
{CAUTION: If you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s position, the right front
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be passenger’s frontal air bag must be off. See Securing
seriously injured or killed if the right front a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is (Models with an Air Bag Off Switch) and Securing a
because the back of the rear-facing child Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System (Models
restraint would be very close to the inflating with an Air Bag Off Switch) in the Index, and Air Bag
air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this including
using a rear-facing child restraint in the right important safety information.
front seat position. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
Even though the air bag off switch is designed restraint properly.
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
some unusual circumstance, even though it is any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child is in it.
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the right front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-41
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”.
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires
that the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
1-42
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints {CAUTION:
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored. Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor only one child restraint. Attaching more than
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the one child restraint to a single bracket could
same side of the vehicle as the seating position cause the anchor to come loose or even break
where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an during a crash. A child or others could be
adjustable head restraint, route the top strap over it. injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
When using a top strap-equipped child restraint in a rear to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
outboard seating position of a crew cab model, route only one child restraint per bracket.
the top strap over the top of the seatback. Then, attach
it to the anchor point for that seating position.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-43
Top Strap Anchor Location
Anchor points for the top strap in a regular or

extended cab vehicle are located behind the front
Extended cab anchors shown seat on the back wall of the passenger compartment.
A. Top strap routing loops You must route the top strap through the loop (A) at
B. Top strap anchors the top of the seatback to attach the strap to the
anchor (B) as shown.
C. LATCH anchors. See Lower Anchorages and Top
Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
1-44
Follow these steps to access the anchors and attach
the top strap to an anchor:
1. Release the rear seatback from its latches (B).
See Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) on page 1-8
or Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) on
page 1-10 for instructions.
2. Attach the top strap to the anchor (A).
3. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks into its
upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
secured properly.
Crew Cab
The anchor points for the top strap on Crew Cab
vehicles are located on the back wall behind the rear
seat. You must pull the seatback forward to access
the anchors.
1-45
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the LATCH System.
If it is you will find anchors (A) in the second row
outboard seating positions (crew cab and extended cab)
and in the front passenger position (regular cab and
extended cab without rear seats).
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-46
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,

you need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the anchors for this child
restraint system, place your hand in a palm-up position
and reach up between the seat cushion and the
seatback.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint Unless the right front passenger’s frontal air bag has
been turned off, never put a rear-facing child restraint
Designed for the LATCH System in this vehicle. Here is why:
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch)
Regular Cab Models and Extended {CAUTION:
Cab Models without Rear Seats
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
Your vehicle has air bags. Regular cab models and seriously injured or killed if the right front
extended cab models without rear seats have an air bag passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is
off switch on the instrument panel you can use to turn because the back of the rear-facing child
off the right front passenger’s frontal air bag. See
restraint would be very close to the inflating
Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this
including important safety information. air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the air bag has been
turned off.
1-48
{CAUTION:
Even though the air bag off switch is designed If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal when you have turned off the air bag, it means
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can that something may be wrong with the air bag
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under system. The right front passenger’s frontal
some unusual circumstance, even though it is air bag could inflate even though the switch
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing is off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone
child restraints be transported in vehicles with whom the national government has identified
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing as a member of a passenger air bag risk group
child restraint, whenever possible. sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in your vehicle) until you have
your vehicle serviced. See Air Bag Off Switch
on page 1-71.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air

bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-71. If your
child restraint is forward-facing, always move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power Seats
on page 1-4. Never use a rear-facing child restraint in
this seat unless the air bag is off.
1-49
2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. {CAUTION:
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
4. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the turned off for a person who is not in a risk
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show group identified by the national government,
you how. that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage be able to inflate and help protect the person
if your vehicle has one. The child restraint sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
instructions will show you how. Also see passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
Top Strap on page 1-42. sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
directions to be sure it is secure. including important safety information.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH anchorages.
Turn on the right front passenger’s frontal air bag when
you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless
the person who will be sitting there is a member of
a passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch
on page 1-71.
1-50
Securing a Child Restraint Designed To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
for the LATCH System (Models disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
without an Air Bag Off Switch)
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab Securing a Child Restraint in a
Models with Rear Seats Rear Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
position you want to use, where the bottom of the system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion. Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
2. Put the child restraint on the seat. you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show the child in the child restraint when and as the
you how. instructions say.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-42.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-51
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock (crew cab only).
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

1-52
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,

pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
will not work properly.
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in Unless the right front passenger’s frontal air bag has
been turned off, never put a rear facing child restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position the right front passenger’s seat. Here is why:
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch)
Regular Cab Models and Extended {CAUTION:
Cab Models without Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air seriously injured or killed if the right front
bag. Regular cab models and extended cab models passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is
without rear seats have a switch on the instrument panel because the back of the rear-facing child
that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
restraint would be very close to the inflating
frontal air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-71 for
more on this, including important safety information. air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the air bag has been
turned off.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
1-54
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
{CAUTION: Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
when you have turned off the air bag, it means you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
that something may be wrong with the air bag child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
system. The right front passenger’s frontal instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
air bag could inflate even though the switch the child in the child restraint when and as the
is off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone instructions say.
whom the national government has identified 1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air
as a member of a passenger air bag risk group bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-71. If your
sit in the right front passenger’s position child restraint is forward-facing, always move the
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this
child restraint in your vehicle) until you have seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power Seats
on page 1-4.
your vehicle serviced. See Air Bag Off Switch
on page 1-71. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-55
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.
1-56
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-57
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on Securing a Child Restraint in the
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag when you
remove the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle Right Front Seat Position (Models
unless the person who will be sitting there is a member
of a passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off
without an Air Bag Off Switch)
Switch on page 1-71.
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models with Rear Seats
{CAUTION: If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
turned off for a person who is not in a risk on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
group identified by the national government, Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
that person will not have the extra protection Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not passenger’s seat.
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
1-58
Here is why: If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
{CAUTION: instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
seriously injured or killed if the right front
frontal air bag, always move the seat as far back
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because as it will go before securing a forward-facing
the back of the rear-facing child restraint child restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or
would be very close to the inflating air bag. Power Seats on page 1-4.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
a rear seat.
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing will show you how.
child restraint in the right front seat position, see
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
1-59
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.
1-60
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-61
Air Bag Systems
q
This part explains the air bag systems. {CAUTION:

Your vehicle has air bags – one air bag for the driver
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side impact if you are not wearing your safety belt – even
air bags; one for the driver and the passenger if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
directly behind the driver and one for the right front during a crash helps reduce your chance of
passenger and the person seated directly behind that hitting things inside the vehicle or being
passenger. ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental
Air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are
from the force of an inflating air bag. But these air bags designed to work with safety belts but do not
must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply replace them.
with federal regulations. Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
Here are the most important things to know about the passenger are designed to work only in
air bag system: moderate to severe crashes where the front of
your vehicle hits something. They are not
designed to inflate in rollover, rear or
low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
1-62
CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued)
The roof-mounted side impact air bags are Always wear your safety belt even with frontal
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe air bags. The driver should sit as far back as
crashes where something hits the side of your possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone against the door.
in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an air bag
for that person.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
{CAUTION: any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate belts offer the best protection for adults, but
with great force, faster than the blink of an not for young children and infants. Neither the
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
as you would be if you were leaning forward, system is designed for them. Young children
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help and infants need the protection that a child
keep you in position for air bag inflation before restraint system can provide. Always secure
and during a crash. children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-63
There is a air bag Where Are the Air Bags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel which
shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-27
for more information.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering

wheel.
1-64
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact air bag
panel on the passenger’s side. for the driver and the person seated directly behind
the driver, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
1-65
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. If your vehicle has side impact
air bags, never secure anything to the roof of
your vehicle by routing the rope or tiedown
through any door or window opening. If you
do, the path of an inflating side impact air bag
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact air bag will be blocked. The path of an inflating air bag
for the right front passenger and the person seated must be kept clear.
directly behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
1-66
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
The driver’s and right front passengers frontal air bags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe designed “threshold level”. The threshold level can vary
frontal, or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
designed “threshold level.” rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall sensors provide information that is used to determine
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for if the air bags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph deployment.
(19.3 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
deployment is about 20 to 24 mph (32.2 to 38.5 km/h). bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
or below this range. of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side impact
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be air bags, inflation is determined by the location and
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal severity of the impact.
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-67
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? But the frontal air bags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing would not help you in many types of collisions,
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag, and related rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front be regarded as anything more than a supplement to
of the right front passenger. For vehicles with side safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows. passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for the side impact air bags.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
1-68
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? {CAUTION:
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
Some components of the air bag module — the steering air. This dust could cause breathing problems
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for people with a history of asthma or other
for the right front passenger’s bag or the ceiling of your breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
vehicle near the side windows — will be hot for a short the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you to do so. If you have breathing problems but
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation does not prevent the window or a door. If you experience breathing
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
problems following an air bag deployment,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
you should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically

unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on and flash
the hazard warning flashers when the air bag inflates
(if battery power is available). You can lock the
doors again by using the door lock. The interior lamps
and hazard warning flashers will deactivate after
approximately 15 minutes.
1-69
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, • Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. system. Improper service can mean that your air
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the bag system will not work properly. See your dealer
right front passenger air bag. for service.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
air bag inflates, you will need some new parts for or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the side
your air bag system. If you do not get them, the air impact air bag covering on the ceiling near the side
bag system will not be there to help protect you windows, the bag may not work properly. You
in another crash. A new system will include air bag may have to replace the air bag module in the
modules and possibly other parts. The service steering wheel, both the air bag module and
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
other parts. air bag, or side impact air bag module and ceiling
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal covering for the roof-mounted side impact air
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. If your vehicle has side impact air bags,
it also has electronic side sensors. Your vehicle
is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which records information about the air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system and when the system
commands air bag inflation. It records the status
of the driver’s safety belt usage in a crash in which
the air bag deploys or a crash in which the air
bag nearly deploys. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
1-70
Air Bag Off Switch Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab • my vehicle has no rear seat;
Models without Rear Seats • my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s)
whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes
If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an extended
must ride in the front because no space is available
cab model without rear seats, it has a switch on
in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal air bag. • the child has a medical condition which, according to
This switch should only be turned to the off position if the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child
the person in the right front passenger’s position is to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the constantly monitor the child’s condition.
national government as follows:
1-71
Medical Condition. A passenger has a To turn off the right front
medical condition which, according to his passenger’s frontal air bag,
insert your ignition key
or her physician: into the switch, push
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special in, and move the switch to
risk for the passenger; and the off position.
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
The air bag off light will come on to let you know that
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is off. The right
{CAUTION: front passenger’s frontal air bag will remain off until
you turn it back on again, and the air bag off light will
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s
frontal air bag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.
1-72
To turn the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag
{CAUTION: on again, insert your
ignition key into the switch,
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on push in, and move the
when you have turned off the air bag, it means switch to the auto position.
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group sit
in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced.
1-73
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your Air
Vehicle Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
have information about servicing your vehicle and the air working properly?
bag systems.To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12. A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
{CAUTION: working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is should contact Customer Assistance before you
turned off and the battery is disconnected, modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
an air bag can still inflate during improper addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
service. You can be injured if you are close to of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-74
Restraint System Check Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
{CAUTION:
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see A crash can damage the restraint systems in
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
its job, have it repaired. may not properly protect the person using it,
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. are working properly after a crash, have them
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and inspected and any necessary replacements
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system made as soon as possible.
does not need regular maintenance.)
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-75
If the LATCH system was being used during a more If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need to
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts. replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
a collision.
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
the collision. if the frontal air bags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
If an air bag inflates, you will need to replace air bag
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
in this section.
been in a collision, or if your air bag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-27.
1-76
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-22
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8 Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-26
Door Locks ....................................................2-8 Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-28
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9 Parking Brake ..............................................2-31
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9 Shifting Into Park (P)
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) .............2-10 (Automatic Transmission) ............................2-32
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11 Shifting Out of Park (P)
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11 (Automatic Transmission) ............................2-34
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...........................2-11 Parking Your Vehicle
Tailgate .......................................................2-11 (Manual Transmission) ...............................2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35
Windows ........................................................2-13 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Manual Windows ..........................................2-13 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-36
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Sliding Rear Window .....................................2-15
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-38
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-38
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16 Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-38
Passlock® ....................................................2-17 Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-41
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-41
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-42
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18 OnStar® System .............................................2-42
2-1
Section 2 Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-44 Assist Handles .............................................2-45
Glove Box ...................................................2-44 Rear Storage Area ........................................2-45
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-44 Bed Rails ....................................................2-45
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-44
2-2
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
There is one double-sided The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
key for the ignition, driver’s locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
door lock, and tailgate. a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be able
to have new ones made easily using this number. Your
dealer should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-42
code number. for more information.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: rainy or snowy weather.
1. This device may not cause interference, and • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
2. This device must accept any interference received, be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
including interference that may cause undesired left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
operation of the device. try again.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. • Check to determine if battery replacement is
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
1. This device may not cause interference, and page 2-6.
2. This device must accept any interference received, • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
including interference that may cause undesired qualified technician for service.
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors. The
parking lamps may also flash and the horn may chirp
Operation when this button is pressed. Press the button again
within three seconds and the horn may chirp.
With this system you can lock and unlock your doors
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away You can program different feedback modes through the
using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with Driver Information Center (DIC). To program the modes,
your vehicle. press and hold both the unlock and lock buttons for three
approximately three seconds and the DIC will display the
UNLOCK: Press this active mode. Then press and hold the trip odometer reset
button to unlock the driver’s stem for approximately 2 seconds to select the modes.
door and turn on the For more information see DIC Controls and Displays
interior lights. The parking on page 3-39.
lamps may also flash,
and the horn may chirp, L (Panic): Press this button to make the horn sound
when this button is pressed. and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up to
30 seconds. To turn them off again, do one of these
three things: wait for 30 seconds; press the panic button
again; or start the vehicle.
Press the unlock button again within three seconds and

all of the doors will unlock.
2-6
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your To replace the battery, do the following:
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless 1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot
entry transmitter should last about two years. between the covers of the transmitter housing.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not Gently pry the transmitter apart.
work at the normal range in any location. If you have 2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, CR2032 or equivalent battery.
it is probably time to change the battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to 4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the key or
Door Locks the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child To lock a door from the inside, rotate the manual lever
can be overcome by extreme heat and can on your door forward. To unlock a door from the
suffer permanent injuries or even death inside, rotate the lever on the door rearward.
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
You will see a colored area on the lever when the door
whenever you leave it.
is unlocked.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Power Door Locks Programmable Automatic Door
If your vehicle has power
Locks
door locks, the switches If your vehicle has power door locks and the remote
are located on the driver’s keyless entry system, it will be equipped with an
and the front passenger’s auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to program
armrests. your vehicle’s power door locks from the driver’s
seating position.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission it will be
programmed to have all the doors lock automatically
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P). All the
doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back
into PARK (P).
Remove the ignition key and press L (lock) to lock If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it will be
all the doors at once. To unlock all the doors, programmed to have all the doors lock when the vehicle
press U (Unlock). speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors
will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever
on each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from To personalize the automatic door locks, see “Automatic
the rear seating area. Door Locks” under DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-39.
2-9
Rear Door Security Locks To use the security locks, do the following:
(Crew Cab) 1. Open one of the rear doors.
If you have the crew cab model, your vehicle may be 2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock clockwise on
equipped with rear door security locks. With this feature, the driver’s side rear door, and counterclockwise on
you can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened the passenger’s side rear door to engage the
from the inside by passengers. rear door security lock.
3. Close the door.
The security lock lever is
4. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door.
located on the inside edge
of each rear door. If you want to open the rear door when the security lock
is on, unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
To return the rear doors to normal use, disengage the
locks by inserting the ignition key and turning the lock
counterclockwise for the driver’s side rear door, and
clockwise for the passenger’s side rear door.
2-10
Lockout Protection Tailgate
If you have power door locks, this feature protects you
from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is
in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)

You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle
If you have an extended cab, your vehicle has rear
while pulling the tailgate down.
doors for convenience in loading and unloading cargo.
When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches
To open a rear door, open the front door. Then,
securely.
use the handle located on the front edge of the rear
door panel to open it. You must close the rear You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key.
door before closing the front door. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate.
Turn the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.
2-11
Removing the Tailgate To partially lower the tailgate do the following:
Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate: 1. Raise the tailgate
slightly.
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly.
Tailgate Partially Down

Tailgate Fully Down 2. Pull upward on each clip. Then, push forward so
the larger part of the hole on the bracket is over
2. Remove the retaining cables from both ends of the the bolt. Pull the end over the bolt.
tailgate by pulling upward on the clip. Then, push
3. Slide the end fitting off the bottom bolt and onto the
forward so the larger part of the hole on the bracket
top bolt.
is over the bolt. Pull the end over the bolt.
3. With the tailgate halfway down, pull the tailgate If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot
toward you at the passenger’s side and then be in the partially open position and must be anchored
move the tailgate to the right to release the on the bottom bolt, using the secondary position on
passenger’s side. the end fitting.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.
Make sure it is secure.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the handle on
each door to open and close each window.
2-13
Power Windows Press the forward edge of the control down to lower
the window.
The power window
Do not hold all four power window switches down for
controls are located
several seconds after the windows have been
on the armrest of
completely lowered or raised, because the vehicle may
each door.
blow a fuse.
Express Down Windows

The driver’s window also has an express down feature
that allows the windows to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the front edge of the window
switch for one second to activate the express down
mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
Crew cab switches partway, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the
shown desired position.
The driver’s door has switches for the passenger Window Lockout
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
If you have a crew cab vehicle with power windows, you
the ignition has been turned to ACC (Accessory) or ON
will also have a window lockout button located above
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
the window switches. This feature disables the rear
See “Retained Accessory Power” under Ignition
windows switches when the window lockout button is
Positions on page 2-18.
pressed. To turn the lockout feature on or off, press the
Pull up the forward edge of the control with the power window lockout button. When the feature is off, the
window symbol on it to raise the window. power windows will operate normally.
2-14
Sliding Rear Window Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the visor down. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the
side to block glare from that direction.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The passenger’s side sun visor has a mirror on it.
Pull down the visor to access the mirror.
If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the

center of the window and slide the glass to open it.
When you close the window, be sure the latch is
engaged.
2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, and OnStar®
locks the doors, with all the doors closed, it will activate
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. the system.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent If the lock button on the remote keyless entry
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make transmitter is pressed, but a door is open, the horn
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can will chirp six times. Close the open door and the
help. system will be activated.
If a locked door is not opened with the remote keyless
Content Theft-Deterrent entry transmitter, or OnStar®, the alarm will go off.
The front turn signal lamps will flash for two minutes,
If your vehicle has the and the horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn
remote keyless entry off to save the battery power.
system, the vehicle has
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
a content theft-deterrent
you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock, or
alarm system.
power door lock switch. The system can only be activated
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, or OnStar®.
You should also remember that you can start your vehicle
with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
To activate the content theft-deterrent system, do the Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
following:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
1. Close all the doors. system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry key after the doors are closed.
transmitter. The security light flashes. • Always unlock a door with a the remote keyless
entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
2-16
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
to unlock a door any other way. lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
Testing the Alarm
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
The alarm can be tested by following these steps: approximately five seconds after the key is turned
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by to RUN. See Security Light on page 3-37.
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
transmitter. about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
open the door. This should set off the alarm. the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button on If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
the remote keyless entry transmitter or start the needs service.
engine.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
lights flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit
flash, see your dealer for service. Breakers on page 5-105. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Passlock® Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
2-17
Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions
Vehicle With the key in the
ignition switch, you
New Vehicle Break-In can turn to four
different positions.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles {CAUTION:
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier On manual transmission vehicles, turning the
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline key to LOCK will lock the steering column and
every time you get new brake linings. result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing This could cause a collision. If you need to
a Trailer on page 4-57 for more information. turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key only to ACC. Do not push the key
in while the vehicle is moving.
2-18
LOCK (A): This position locks your steering wheel, START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
ignition and transmission on automatic transmission When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
vehicles. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, this switch will return to ON for normal driving.
position locks your steering wheel. It is a theft-deterrent When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
feature. You will only be able to remove your key to operate your electrical accessories, such as the
when the ignition is turned to LOCK. radio or items plugged into the accessory power outlets.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
is in PARK (P). door when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK and the key
is in the ignition.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key. Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is, turn Your vehicle is equipped with Retained Accessory
the steering wheel left and right while you turn the Power (RAP) which will allow certain features of your
key hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle vehicle to continue working for up to 20 minutes after the
needs service. ignition key is turned to LOCK.
ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position in which Your radio and power windows will work when the
you can operate your electrical accessories or items ignition key is in ON or ACC. Once the key is turned
plugged into the accessory power outlets. It also unlocks from ON to OFF, these features will continue to work for
the steering wheel and ignition. Use this position if up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
your vehicle must be pushed or towed.
ON (C): This is the position that the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to
operate your electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
2-19
Starting Your Engine Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
Automatic Transmission ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is your engine gets warm.
a safety feature. To restart when you are already Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the can damage your starter motor. Wait about
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
vehicle is stopped. your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, push
Manual Transmission the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking you hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
2-20
Depending on the outside temperature, the engine Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
starter may continue cranking the engine up to electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
approximately four seconds after you release the parts or accessories, you could change the way the
ignition key. This is normal. engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather
might not perform properly.
(below 0°F or 18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to Engine Coolant Heater
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
the key.
In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the engine
2. If your engine still will not start (or starts but then coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
key in START for about three seconds. When the At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. heater is not required.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
2-21
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
1. Turn off the engine. from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. damaged.
The cord is located in the engine compartment How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
behind the underhood fuse block on the driver’s in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
side of the vehicle. kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110–volt AC outlet. of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
{CAUTION: particular area.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet

Automatic Transmission Operation
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the

steering column.
2-22
It features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument cluster. This display must be powered CAUTION: (Continued)
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out
of PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF,
but not locked, there will be a small current drain on Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
your battery which could discharge your battery over running unless you have to. If you have left the
a period of time. If you need to leave your key in engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is You or others could be injured. To be sure your
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable vehicle will not move, even when you are on
from the battery to prevent discharging your battery. fairly level ground, always set your parking
There are several different positions for your shift lever. brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission)
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see
because your vehicle cannot move easily. Towing a Trailer on page 4-57.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

{CAUTION: starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
by pushing the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
CAUTION: (Continued) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you want. See Shifting Out of
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-34.
2-23
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
is moving forward could damage the transmission. by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, need more power for passing, and you are:
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, • Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow accelerator pedal about halfway down.
on page 4-42.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not accelerator all the way down.
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are You will shift down to the next gear and have more
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. power.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
{CAUTION: carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when towing
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not or winding roads or for off-road driving.
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-24
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed {CAUTION:
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
forward, the transmission will not shift into FIRST (1) page 2-32.
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-25
Manual Transmission Operation THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
Five-Speed way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
This is your shift pattern.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal. After
the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRAL
Here is how to operate your manual transmission: and release the clutch pedal. Then press the clutch again
and shift into REVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
the fifth gear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
Your transmission has a lock out feature which prevents
you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.
a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift is moving forward could damage the transmission.
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Then press The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
the clutch pedal back down and shift into FIRST (1). Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press parking your vehicle.
the accelerator pedal.
2-26
Up-Shift Light Shift Speeds
This light will show you
when to shift to the next {CAUTION:
higher gear for best
fuel economy.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next downshift.
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with
a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when
the transfer case is in 4LO.
For more information, see Up-Shift Light (Manual
Transmission) on page 3-30.
2-27
Four-Wheel Drive Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send
your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra 2m(2HI): This setting is for driving in most street and
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read in two-wheel drive.
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive.
You should use two-wheel-drive high (2HI) for most N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
normal driving conditions. NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive

for an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive in
{CAUTION:
four-wheel drive on pavement for extended periods
of time. Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31.
4m(4HI): This setting engages your front axle to help

The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
steering wheel on the instrument panel. traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
2-28
4n(4LO): This setting also engages your front axle to Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
give you extra traction. It sends the maximum power To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you stopped or moving less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the
were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped
climbing or descending steep hills. with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when transmission. The preferred method for shifting into
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in Press and release the 4LO button. You must wait for
for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed. illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear
or releasing the clutch pedal.
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting. If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI 30 seconds and not complete the shift.
Press and release the 4HI button. This can be done at On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO button. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Press 4LO again.
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.
Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated
before shifting your transmission into gear. Press
the 4LO button again to complete the shift. This will get
you into 4LO, but you should take your vehicle in for
service to restore normal operation.
2-29
Shifting from 4LO to 2HI or 4HI Shifting to NEUTRAL
To shift from 4LO to 2HI or 4HI, your vehicle must be Use NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle. See
stopped or moving less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 for towing
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal instructions. To shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL,
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is set the parking brake, then press and hold the 2HI
to have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h). Press and the 4LO buttons at the same time for 10 seconds.
and release the 4HI button. You must wait for the
4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated Shifting out of NEUTRAL
before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing After towing your vehicle, you will have to shift out of
the clutch pedal. NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out of NEUTRAL,
If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear do the following:
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
30 seconds but not complete the shift. pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, if your information.
transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission 2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles with a
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the manual transmission.
4HI button. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing, shift 3. Put an automatic transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or
your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4HI press the clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission.
transmission into gear. Press the 4HI button again 4. Press the button for the desired transfer case
to complete the shift. This will get you into 4HI, but you position (2HI, 4HI or 4LO).
should take your vehicle in for service to restore 5. Shift the transmission to the desired gear. After the
normal operation. transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL, the
indicator light will go out.
A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
of NEUTRAL.
2-30
Parking Brake
The parking brake
pedal is located to
the left of the regular
brake pedal, near
the driver’s door.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
down with your right foot. Push down the parking above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle the brake system warning light will go off.
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
seconds. The chime will deactivate and the light will turn overheat the brake system and cause premature
off when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
moving below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System the parking brake is fully released and the brake
Warning Light on page 3-30. warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-57.
2-31
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Transmission) 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-57.
• Pull the lever toward you.
2-32
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
• Move the lever up as far as it will go. your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
PARK (P). parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-33
Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your Transmission)
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition, you
lock” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Transmission Operation on page 2-22.
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-32. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another the gear you want.
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACC (Accessory). (There is no shift
interlock in this key position.)
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-34
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Parking Over Things That Burn
Transmission)
Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Before you
get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into
REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake. Once
the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
key to LOCK, remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-57.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-35
Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
{CAUTION: It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and {CAUTION:
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if: Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different. your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
over high points on the road or over road the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
debris. One place this can happen is a garage.
• Repairs were not done correctly. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been NEVER park in a garage with the engine
modified improperly. running.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
your vehicle: See Winter Driving on page 4-38.
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-36
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
is running unless you have to. If you have drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
left the engine running, the vehicle can move Drive on page 2-28.
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
when you are on fairly level ground, always
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
set your parking brake and move the shift Transmission) on page 2-32.
lever to PARK (P).
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-57.
2-37
Mirrors Map Lamps
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press
Manual Rearview Mirror the button next to each lamp.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press Cleaning the Mirror
the tab forward (away from you) for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you) for night driving. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
The mirror may have lamps. To manually turn the lamps
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
on or off, press the button next to each lamp.
Manual Rearview Mirror with Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

OnStar® with Compass and Temperature
Display
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
the OnStar® System and map lamps. Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass, temperature display, and
Mirror Operation map lamps.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (away from you) for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-42 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
2-38
Mirror Operation Compass Operation
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the
rapid changing from the day to night positions while compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
driving under lights and through traffic. is driven.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is
the compass will show two character boxes for
automatically activated when the vehicle is started. approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off the mirror will display the current compass heading.
by pressing this button located on the lower part of For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
the mirror. Press and hold the button for up to
three seconds to turn this feature on or off. Compass Calibration
T (Indicator Light): This light will turn on when the If after two seconds the display does not show a
automatic dimming feature is active. compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
Map Lamps be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note
pad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears in
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the compass window, the compass needs calibration.
the mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off,
press the button next to each lamp. The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving
the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode by
pressing and holding the on/off button until a C appears
on the compass display.
2-39
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone

number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button
and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-40
Temperature Display Operation Outside Power Mirrors
The outside air temperature is displayed in the window
located at the lower center of the mirror face. If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
Press and hold the far right button for four seconds located on the driver’s
and release. This will change the temperature reading door armrest.
between degrees Fahrenheit, degrees Celsius, or
turn the display off.
Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
Outside Manual Mirrors 1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
Adjust these mirrors by hand so that you can just see to choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a 2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad
comfortable driving position. to move the mirror in the direction you want the
The mirrors can be folded inward to prevent damage mirror to go.
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push 3. Return the selector switch to the center position
the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its once the mirrors are adjusted.
original position, push outward. Be sure to return both
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirrors to the unfolded position before driving.
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse
the mirror direction using the control pad.
2-41
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
OnStar® System
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return
the mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to the unfolded position before
driving.
Outside Convex Mirror

Your passenger’s outside rearview mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more Your vehicle may have this feature. OnStar® uses
from the driver’s seat. global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology,
wireless communications, and state of the art call
centers to provide you with a wide range of safety,
{CAUTION: security, information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
A convex mirror can make things (like other conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your OnStar®-equipped
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you www.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your (1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,
before changing lanes. 7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-42
OnStar® Services Luxury and Leisure Plan
One of the following plans is normally included for a • All Directions and Connections Plan services
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with • Personal Concierge
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs. OnStar® Personal Calling
Safe and Sound Plan With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
• Emergency Services calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
• Roadside Assistance contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance OnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
• AccidentAssist call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Remote Door Unlock OnStar® Virtual Advisor

• Remote Diagnostics With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
• Online Concierge such as traffic and weather reports. You are able
Directions and Connections Plan to listen and reply to your e-mail through your vehicle’s
speakers.
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-43
Storage Areas Rear Cupholders
If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cab model,
your vehicle also has two rear cupholders. On crew cab
Glove Box models, the cupholders are located at the front end
To open the glove box, pull on the lever. of the rear center seat cushion. On extended cab
models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top of
the rear center console.
Cupholder(s)
Front Cupholders Front Armrest Storage Area
Your vehicle may have two cupholders located on the Your vehicle may have a two-tiered center armrest
lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the front
located at the front end of the console. Vehicles of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to the top
with bench seats may have cupholders attached to storage area. A second tab is located below the top one
the front of the center seat. and allows you to access the bottom storage area. Lift up
on the lower tab to release the latch. Then, raise the lid of
the lower storage area. The upper storage area will lift up
with the lid of the lower storage area.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until you
feel the latch close.
2-44
Assist Handles Bed Rails
Your vehicle may have assist handles to be used when
getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle has assist
handles, they may be located above the front passenger {CAUTION:
door if you have a regular cab, or above the front and
rear passenger doors if you have an extended cab If your vehicle has bed rails, they are there for
or crew cab. appearance only. If you try to tie down a load
If your vehicle is equipped with roof-mounted side with them, or to secure things in your truck,
impact air bags, there will be assist handles located not only can it damage the bed rails, but the
above both the driver’s and front passenger’s doors. load can loosen. This could cause injury to
you or others. Secure loads by using the cargo
Rear Storage Area tie-down loops, inside the truck bed area.
If your vehicle is an extended cab model, it may be
equipped with storage compartments under the
rear seats.
2-45
✍ NOTES
2-46
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-26
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-27
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-7 Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-28
Horn .............................................................3-7 Battery Warning Light ....................................3-29
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7 Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ...............3-30
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-31
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-32
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-18 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19 Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-36
Climate Controls ............................................3-19 Security Light ...............................................3-37
Climate Control System .................................3-19 Cruise Control Light ......................................3-37
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22 Highbeam On Light .......................................3-37
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ...........3-38
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23 Fuel Gage ...................................................3-38
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25 Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-39
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25 DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-39
Tachometer .................................................3-26 DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-41
3-1
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-44 Theft-Deterrent Feature
Setting the Time for Radios without (Non-RDS Radios) .....................................3-70
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................3-45 Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-70
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Reception ...........................................3-70
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................3-45 Care of Your CDs .........................................3-70
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-46 Care of Your CD Player ................................3-71
Radio with CD ..............................................3-49 Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-71
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-58 Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-71
3-2
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
Manual transmission shown, automatic transmission similar
3-4
The main components of your vehicle’s instrument H. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive Buttons.
panel are the following: See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22. and Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-44.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. J. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-19.
Cluster on page 3-24. K. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard System on page 3-19.
Warning Flashers on page 3-6. L. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
E. Passenger Side Air Bag. See Air Bag Systems on Outlets on page 3-18.
page 1-62. M. Air Bag Off Switch (Regular cab and rear seat delete
F. Park Brake Release. See Parking Brake on only). See “Air Bag Off Switch” under Air Bag
page 2-31. Systems on page 1-62.
G. Horn. See Horn on page 3-7. N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-44.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the instrument panel,
between the two air vents
in the center.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-6
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. If you have the tilt steering wheel,
you can raise it to the highest level to allow more The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
room for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle. steering column, under the turn signal lever.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
The lever on the left side of the steering column An arrow on the
includes the following: instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction
• Turn and Lane Change Signals of the turn or lane change.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass
• Windshield Wipers
• Windshield Washer As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
• Cruise Control out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
3-8
Turn Signal On Chime Flash-to-Pass
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off, position.
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and release it.
Messages on page 3-41 for more information.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push normal operation.
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams

are on, this indicator light
on the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
3-9
Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
{CAUTION:
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. In freezing weather, do not use your washer
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or blocking your vision.
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter QL(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
the delay. with the windshield washer symbol at the top of
the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed, windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past window and then either stop or return to your preset
the delay settings. speed.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the

band to the second solid band past the delay settings.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-10
Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Your vehicle may be equipped with cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
R(On): This position activates the system. and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
T(Set): Press this button to set the speed. the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. When road
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot turn cruise control back on.
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-11
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
{CAUTION: disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
If you leave your cruise control on when you Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
are not using cruise, you might hit a button you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
and go into cruise when you do not want to. to resume/accelerate.
You could be startled and even lose control. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
Keep the cruise control switch off until you stay there.
want to use cruise control.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
1. Move the cruise control switch to on. hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on

the instrument panel
will illuminate when
the cruise control
is engaged.
3-12
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Control Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator Using Cruise Control on Hills
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
cruise control will turn off. upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
• Move the cruise switch from on to on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
the speed you want, and then release the switch. to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
To increase your speed in very small amounts, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about use cruise control on steep hills.
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the • Step lightly on the brake pedal
lower speed you want, then release it. • Move the cruise control switch to off
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press Erasing Speed Memory
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps AUTO: Turn the knob to this position to automatically
turn on the headlamps at normal brightness, together
with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
See “Automatic Headlamp System” following, for more
information.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this position to

turn on the parking lamps, together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel • License Plate Lamps
operates the exterior lamps.
• Instrument Panel Lights
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the
right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior 2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position to turn
lamp positions. on the headlamps, together with the previously listed
lamps and lights.
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all
exterior lamps including the DRLs. You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
3-14
Automatic Headlamp System If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. When you leave the garage, it will take approximately several
it is dark enough outside, your automatic headlamp seconds for the automatic headlamp system to
system will turn on your headlamps at the normal change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps, your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument panel as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
lights. The radio lights may also be dim. control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Your vehicle may have a light sensor located on the Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-17.
top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered,
or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
Lamps On Reminder
The system may also turn on your headlamps If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
when driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
weather or a tunnel. This is normal. on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off and then
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running off once the ignition is in LOCK.
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the
light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than
the delay.
3-15
Daytime Running Lamps Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short your fog lamps to work.
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles The fog lamp button
first sold in Canada. is located near the
exterior lamps control.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
• The light sensor determines it is daytime. headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on. again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the
The taillamps, sidemarkers and other lamps will not button when the fog lamps are on.
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either. Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps. in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-16
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam Interior Lamps
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again. Instrument Panel Brightness
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the exterior lamps control. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-14.
fog lamp button again.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
Cargo Lamps up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights
and the radio display. This will only work if the
If your vehicle is equipped with cargo lamps, you can headlamps or parking lamps are on.
use them if you need more light in the cargo area of your To turn on the dome lamp, with the vehicle doors
vehicle. The dome lamps must be on before you can closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
turn on the cargo lamps.
Dome Lamp
Press this button to
turn the cargo lamps The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
on and off. You can also turn the dome lamp on by turning the
thumbwheel all the way up. In this position, the dome
lamp will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E (Dome Override): Press this button, located

below the exterior lamp control, to turn the dome lamp
off even when a door is opened. To return the lamp
to automatic operation, press the button again.
3-17
Exit Lighting Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when off electrical equipment when not in use and do
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will not not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
come on if the dome override button is pressed in. amperage rating.
Battery Run-Down Protection Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK. problem, see your dealer for additional information
This will keep your battery from running down. on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
Accessory Power Outlets vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
Your vehicle may have an accessory power outlet.
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary dealer before adding electrical equipment.
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
CB radio.
the proper installation instructions included with
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets the equipment.
located on the lower part of the instrument panel below
the climate control system and there may be one Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
located on the rear of the center console. A small cap damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
must be pulled down to access an accessory power any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
outlet. When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the plug because the power outlets are designed for
the protective cap. accessory power plugs only.
3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Your ashtray is located at the front of your center Climate Control System
console area.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from Uplevel climate controls shown, base similar
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. and ventilation for your vehicle.
3-19
Temperature Knob \(Bi-Level): Select this mode to direct approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and the
The left knob on the control panel is used to adjust the remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster
temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knob and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
the temperature.
Fan Knob [ (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to the floor
outlets. Recirculation does not work in this mode.
9 (Fan): The center knob on the control panel is Mode Buttons
used to control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the @ (Recirculation): If your vehicle has air
fan speed. conditioning, you will have the recirculation feature.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will This mode recirculates air inside the cabin, and prevents
still enter the vehicle and will be directed according to outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used
the position of the mode knob. to prevent outside odors from entering your vehicle
and cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Mode Knob Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or
off. An indicator light on the button will come on to
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct
let you know the recirculation mode is activated.
the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to select
one of the following modes: Recirculation is only available in the bi-level and vent
modes. If you push the recirculation button while
H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air to the the system is in any other mode, the light on the button
instrument panel outlets. will flash to indicate that recirculation is not available.
3-20
#(Air Conditioning): Your vehicle may have air Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
conditioning. Press this button to turn the air-conditioning windshield more quickly. For best results, clear all snow
system on or off. An indicator light on the button will and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
come on to let you know the air conditioning is activated. Turn the mode knob on the climate control panel
When the system is on, this setting cools and clockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.
dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is /(Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to the
turned off. windshield, the side window outlets, and to the
floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system
You may notice a slight change in engine performance runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and temperature is near freezing or below. Recirculation
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed is not available in this mode.
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature. 0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the windshield, and the side window outlets. When you
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of select this mode, the system runs the air conditioning
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling compressor unless the outside temperature is near,
or after turning off the engine. This is normal. or below freezing. Recirculation is not available in
this mode.
Defogging and Defrosting Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers.
3-21
Outlet Adjustment Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in
the center of the outlet to direct the air up or down,
The flow-through outlets on your vehicle allow outside or slide the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the
air to enter your vehicle while it is moving. Outside airflow from side-to-side.
air will also enter your vehicle while the air conditioning
compressor is running. Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
Use the thumbwheel on inlets at the base of the windshield that may
the outlets to change the block the flow of air into your vehicle.
direction of the air flow.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
locate them. when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
Warning lights and gages can signal that something what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
to your warning lights and gages could also save you or and gages. They are a big help.
others from injury.
Your vehicle may also have a DIC that works along with
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you Center (DIC) on page 3-39 for more information.
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be
alarmed when this happens.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell you how
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). far your vehicle has been driven since you last set
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has the trip odometer to zero.
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) To view the trip odometer, press the trip odometer reset
or kilometers (used in Canada). stem until TRIP is displayed. To reset the current trip
The odometer mileage can be checked without the odometer, hold the reset stem. See “Trip Odometer”
vehicle running. Simply press the trip information stem. under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-39 for
See “Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays more information.
on page 3-39 for more information.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it cannot, then it is set at zero, and a label
must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
3-25
Tachometer Safety Belt Reminder Light
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
per minute (rpm). come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
Notice: If you operate the engine with the already buckled.
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be The safety belt light will
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine also come on and stay
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area. on for several seconds,
then it will flash until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime

nor the light will come on.
3-26
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument {CAUTION:
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air may not be working properly. The air bags in
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
systems, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-62. could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
This light will come on vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
when you start your readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle, and it will flash vehicle.
for a few seconds.
Then the light should
go out. This means the The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
system is ready. seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-27
Air Bag Off Light
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
{CAUTION:
Models without Rear Seats If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
When you turn the air bag off switch to the off position, turned off for a person who is not in a risk
the off indictor will come on and stay on to remind you group identified by the national government,
that the air bag has been turned off. When you turn the that person will not have the extra protection
air bag off switch to the auto position, the on indicator will of an air bag. In a crash, the frontal air bag
come on. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more would not be able to inflate and help protect
on this, including important safety information. the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group identified by the national
government. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-71 for more on this, including
important safety information.
3-28
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION: This light will come on
briefly when you start the
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on vehicle, as a check to
when you have turned off the air bag, it means show you it is working;
that something may be wrong with the air bag then it should go out.
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
member of a passenger air bag risk group may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
sit in the right front passenger’s position Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat) may stall.
until you have your vehicle serviced. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and climate control system.
3-29
Up-Shift Light Brake System Warning Light
(Manual Transmission) Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
This light appears still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
when you need to you need both parts working well.
shift to the next higher If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
gear on a manual problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
transmission vehicle.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get

the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light” under
Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-26 for more
information.
United States Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the

ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-30
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more information. Light
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is With the anti-lock brake
fully released, it means you have a brake problem. system, this light will
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the come on briefly when
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is you start your engine
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the to show it is working.
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, Then it will turn off.
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing This is normal.
Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
{CAUTION: system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
Your brake system may not be working properly
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you The anti-lock brake system warning light should
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
have the vehicle towed for service.
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This gage shows Check Engine Light
the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board

Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, the assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle environment. The check engine light comes on to
under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
soon as possible. before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
information. designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
3-32
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
light on, after a while, your emission controls working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not not running. If the light does not come on, have it
be as good and your engine may not run as repaired. This light will also come on during a
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may malfunction in one of two ways:
not be covered by your warranty. • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your and may damage the emission control system on
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
with other than those of the same Tire Performance required.
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission • Light On Steady — An emission control system
controls and may cause this light to come on. malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly Diagnosis and service may be required.
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
3-33
If the Light is Flashing If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system
your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following:
• Reducing vehicle speed. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
• Avoiding hard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, should turn the light off.
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the will usually be corrected when the electrical system
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
the previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible. If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-34
If you experience one or more of these conditions, Here are some things you need to know to help your
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least vehicle pass an inspection:
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, engine light is on or not working properly.
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
any mechanical or electrical problems that may emission control systems have not been completely
have developed. diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
Programs battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
Some state/provincial and local governments have or designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
may begin programs to inspect the emission control during normal driving. This may take several days
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
registration. system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-35
Oil Pressure Light This light tells you
if there could be a
problem with your
engine oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned. The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
Check your oil as soon as possible and have START. It goes off once you start your engine.
your vehicle serviced. That’s a check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t
come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there
to warn you if something goes wrong.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance When the light comes on and stays on, it means that
may damage the engine. The repairs would not oil isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be covered by your warranty. Always follow be low on oil and you might have some other system
the maintenance schedule in this manual for problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and “OIL” under
changing engine oil. DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for more
information.
3-36
Security Light Cruise Control Light
This light will come on This symbol appears on
briefly when you turn your instrument panel
the key to START. whenever you set
The light will stay on your cruise control.
until the engine starts. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-8.
If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes, the

Passlock® system has entered a tamper mode. If
the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock® on page 2-17. Highbeam On Light
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock® This light comes on
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by whenever the high-beam
Passlock®, and you should see your dealer. headlamps are on.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 for
additional information regarding the security light.
3-37
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
Light • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
Running Lamps are on. gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” under Exterior • The gage does not go back to empty when you turn
Lamps on page 3-14 for more information. off the ignition.
Fuel Gage When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see a LOW
FUEL message on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41
When the ignition is on, for more information.
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel
you have remaining in
the fuel tank.
3-38
Driver Information Center (DIC) Trip Information
Odometer
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster. The DIC can display information such as the The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
trip odometer, and personalization features. when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles or kilometers.
DIC Controls and Displays
Trip Odometer
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when
the ignition is on. After a short delay the DIC will display Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears
the current driver and the information that was last on the DIC display. This shows the current distance
displayed before the engine was turned off. traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer in
either miles or kilometers.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip Press and hold the reset stem for approximately
odometer reset stem on the DIC will acknowledge any four seconds to reset the trip odometer.
current warning or service messages.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC. These
modes are explained following. The DIC trip odometer
reset stem is located on the instrument panel cluster next
to the DIC display. To scroll through the available
functions, press and release the reset stem.
3-39
GM Oil Life System™ Automatic Door Locks
Press the reset stem until OIL LIFE appears (flashing) With the vehicle’s engine off, and the ignition in the
on the display. The GM Oil Life System™ shows LOCK position, press and hold the power door
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show lock button for approximately 3 seconds until the DIC
100% when the system is reset after an oil change. displays the current door lock mode. Then press
It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule the reset stem for approximately two seconds to switch
consistent with your driving conditions. modes. The following are the mode choices:
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change. Mode 1 (default): Lock all doors when the vehicle is
To reset the oil life system press and hold the reset shifted out of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission,
stem while OIL LIFE is displayed. The system will reset or when vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24km/h)
and a beep will sound. with a manual transmission. Doors will unlock when
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) with an automatic
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule transmission, or when the ignition key is removed on a
in this manual. The oil change reminder will not manual transmission.
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that
Mode 2: Turns off the automatic door locks.
may affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does
not measure how much oil you have in your engine.
So, be sure to check your oil level often. See Engine
Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
3-40
Mode 3: Lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted DIC Warnings and Messages
out of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission,
or when vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24km/h) Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
with a manual transmission. Driver’s door will unlock the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) with an that some action may be needed by the driver to
automatic transmission, or when the ignition key is correct the condition. More than one message may
removed on a manual transmission. appear at one time. They will appear one after the other.
The messages are displayed for three seconds each.
Mode 4: Lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted Some messages may not require immediate action
out of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission, but you should press and release the trip odometer reset
or when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph stem to acknowledge that you received the message
(24km/h) with a manual transmission. No doors and clear it from the display. Each message must
will unlock. be acknowledged individually. Some messages cannot
be cleared from the display because they are more
Language urgent. These messages require action before they can
You can choose the language in which the DIC be removed from the DIC display. The following are
information is displayed. Press the reset stem until the possible messages that can be displayed and some
LANGUAGE is displayed. While LANGUAGE is on the information about them.
display, press and hold the reset stem until the language
changes from ENGLISH to the language you desire. AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
You can choose from English, Spanish, or French. This message will be displayed when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in
your vehicle needs to be turned off. See and Engine
Overheating on page 5-28 and Climate Control System
on page 3-19 for more information. It will be displayed
along with the ENG HOT message.
3-41
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) CHANGE OIL
This message will be displayed on the DIC if there is a This message will be displayed on your DIC when the
problem with your antilock brake system. Check oil needs to be changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as
your antilock brake system as soon as possible and soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. See
have your vehicle serviced. See Brakes on page 5-39 Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on
and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 6-4 for more information. Press the reset stem
page 3-31 for more information. Pressing the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the display.
DIC display.
DOORS
BATTERY
This message will be displayed on your DIC when one
This message will be displayed when there is a problem of your doors is ajar. You should check all the doors
with your vehicle’s battery. See Battery on page 5-42 on your vehicle to make sure they are closed. Press the
and Battery Warning Light on page 3-29 for more reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
information. from the display.
BRAKES ENG (Engine) HOT

This message will be displayed on the DIC if there This message will be displayed on your DIC when
is a problem with your brakes. Check your brakes as your engine coolant temperature is hot. Check your
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. engine coolant temperature gage. See Engine Coolant
See Brakes on page 5-39 and Brake System Warning Temperature Gage on page 3-32 for more information.
Light on page 3-30 for more information. Press and You should have your vehicle serviced as soon as
release the reset stem to acknowledge the message possible if you suspect your engine is overheating. See
and clear it from the DIC display. Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more information.
3-42
FLUID LOW TRAC (Traction)
This message will be displayed on the DIC if your brake If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you will
fluid is low. Check the brake fluid as soon as possible and see this message when the TCS is active. See Traction
have your vehicle serviced. See Brakes on page 5-39 for Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for more information.
more information. Press the reset stem to acknowledge Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
the message and clear it from the DIC display. message and clear it from the DIC display.
FUEL CAP OIL

This message will be displayed if your vehicle’s fuel cap This message will be displayed when your oil pressure
is either off or loose. You should pull over and check is low. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-36, and
to see if your vehicle’s fuel cap is secure as soon Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
as possible. You may also see the check engine light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction OIL LIFE
Indicator Lamp on page 3-32 for more information.
This message will be displayed when your GM Oil Life
Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message and
System needs to be checked. Press the reset stem
clear it from the display.
to acknowledge the message. For more information,
LOW FUEL see “GM Oil Life System” under DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-39.
This message will be displayed on your DIC if the level
of fuel in your vehicle is low. You should also check PARK BRK (Brake)
your fuel gage. See Fuel Gage on page 3-38 for more
This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s
information. You should fill your vehicle’s tank as
parking brake is active. See Parking Brake on page 2-31
soon as possible.
and Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30 for
more information. Press the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
3-43
REDUCED POWER SERV VEH (Service Vehicle)
This message will be displayed on your DIC when This message will be displayed on your DIC if your
your vehicle’s engine power is reduced. Press the reset vehicle needs service. You should have your vehicle
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from serviced as soon as possible.
the display.
TURN SIGNAL
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive)
This message will be displayed on your DIC when your
This message will be displayed on your DIC when there turn signal is on for approximately 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of
is a problem with your transfer case control system. travel. Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message
Check the transfer case on your vehicle and have and clear it from the display.
it serviced. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more
information about your transfer case. Press the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from
Audio System(s)
the display. Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
TRACTION FAULT your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can add
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it
may see this message if there is a problem with your properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with
Traction Control System (TCS). Check your TCS the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio or other
as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 systems may interfere with the operation of sound
for more information. Press the reset stem to equipment that has been added improperly.
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
3-44
So, before adding sound equipment, check with Setting the Time for Radios with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units. Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle, find Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
all of its controls to be sure you are getting the most out button until the correct minute appears on the display.
of the advanced engineering that went into it. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS
Radio Data Systems (RDS) TIME appears on the display. To accept this time, press
and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on for another 2 seconds. If the time is not available from
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
appears on the display. To display the time with the
ignition off, press RCL, HR, or MIN and the time RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
will appear on the display for a few seconds. There is tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
an initial two-second delay before the clock goes few minutes for your time to update.
into time-set mode.
3-45
AM-FM Radio Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to

the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
Playing the Radio
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
on and off. two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
decrease volume. arrow again to stop scanning presets.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
between the radio station frequency and the time. the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
3-46
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1, AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following steps: Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
1. Turn the radio on. increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station. To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever and a zero will appear on the display.
you press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return. To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-47
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the appears on the display it means that your radio has not
up or the down arrow to move the sound toward the been configured properly for your vehicle and must
right or the left speakers. be returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears Theftlock® system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the returned to the dealer for service.
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if you have a regular
cab model.
3-48
Radio with CD Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you do not
want to use automatic volume, select OFF.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appears
Playing the Radio on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system name of the program (if available).
on and off.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
q VOL r (Volume): Turn this knob to increase knob until you see the display you want, then hold
or to decrease volume. the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic beep and the selected display will now be the default.
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
3-49
Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
or AM. The display will show your selection. favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
q TUNE r: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow for more pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and you press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you will hear one beep. The radio will go to a station, play you set will return and the equalization that
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press you selected will be automatically stored for that
either arrow again to stop scanning. pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
and you will hear two beeps. The radio will go to the first
preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected
band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-50
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may sound toward the right or the left speakers.
want to decrease the treble.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position, push push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
speaker control is displayed. All will appear on the display the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
and you will hear a beep with the level display in the will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
middle position. will show the speaker balance.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
to select customized equalization settings designed position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical. or speaker control is displayed. All will appear on
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, the display and you will hear a beep with the level
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings. display in the middle position.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
3-51
Radio Data System (RDS) Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data To select and find a desired PTY perform the
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only following:
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. 1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
With RDS, your radio can do the following: select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming 2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
• Receive announcements concerning local and 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
national emergencies SEEK TYPE button or either SEEK arrow to
take you to the PTY’s first station.
• Display messages from radio stations
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
This system relies upon receiving specific information button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
from these stations and will only work when the the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station then to go to another station.
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause 5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
contact the radio station. go back to Step 1.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead stations with the selected PTY and traffic
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the announcements.
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
broadcast. will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-52
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by Setting Preset PTYs
performing the following:
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type favorite PTYs. These pushbuttons have factory
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
display. six FM2) by performing the following steps:
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. 1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either 2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
the stations in the PTY. display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station. 3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
stations with the selected PTY and traffic pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
announcements. press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency set will return.
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-53
RDS Messages When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop radio station you will hear it.
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
off alert announcements. announcements, press this button and the radio
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
all RDS stations. radio will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a
traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station
INFO (Information): If the current station has a you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC
message, the information symbol will appear on the will appear on the display.
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
numbers, etc. button to turn off the traffic announcements.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
through the message at your own speed, press CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will announcements.
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
symbol will disappear from the display until another
new message is received. The old message can
be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
3-54
Radio Messages The CD player can play the small 8 cm single CDs with
an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system are loaded in the same manner.
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that your due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
radio has not been configured properly for your of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
vehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service. CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
to the dealer for service. try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
Playing a CD in the CD player.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
The CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want
later in this section.
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the the start of the current track if it has been playing
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the for more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing, where it number will appear on the display. If you hold this
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
3-55
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
TRACK and the track number will appear on the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
once, the player will continue moving forward through number will appear on the display when each track
the CD. starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at of the current or to the previous track. Press the
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
the normal playing speed. Release it to play the will continue moving backward or forward through
passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track will the CD.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
q SCAN r: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it to 10 seconds of each track of the CD. Press either
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
the normal playing speed. Release it to play the
passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track will
3-56
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the CD Messages
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
default on the display (track or elapsed time), press this reasons:
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep normal, the CD should play.
and the selected display will now be the default.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD and try again.
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded. • There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if try a known good CD.
this button is pressed first. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-57
Radio with Six-Disc CD AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you do not want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Press
Playing the Radio this knob with the ignition off to display the time.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system To change the default on the display, press the RCL
on and off. knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease will now be the default.
volume.
3-58
Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
AM. The display will show your selection. favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
the next or to the previous station and stay there. 3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you set will return and the equalization that you
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
selected will be automatically stored for that
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
pushbutton.
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
3-59
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS, AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
to increase or to decrease. The display will show BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak sound toward the right or the left speakers.
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
position, push the AUDIO knob. The radio will on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
produce one beep and adjust the display level to the toward the front or the rear speakers.
middle position.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will position.
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
to select customized equalization settings designed or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical. appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears on the display.
3-60
Radio Data System (RDS) Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only 1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
With RDS, your radio can do the following: will appear on the display.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type 2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
of programming 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
• Receive announcements concerning local and SEEK arrow to take you to the PTY’s first station.
national emergencies 4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
• Display messages from radio stations and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
This system relies upon receiving specific information go to another station.
from these stations and will only work when the 5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause go back to Step 1.
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station. If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station announcements.
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-61
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will stations.
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast. To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
PTY by performing the following:
Setting Preset PTYs
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
appear on the display. favorite PTYs. These pushbuttons have factory
PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
six FM2) by performing the following steps:
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY. 2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-62
RDS Messages TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
When an alert announcement comes on the current station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
announcements, press this button and the radio
off alert announcements.
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
all RDS stations. TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is
INFO (Information): If the current station has a found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
through the message at your own speed, press the INFO
button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
the display with each press. Once the complete message volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
until another new message is received. The old message and the brackets are displayed.
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
3-63
Playing a CD LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs To insert one CD, do the following:
are loaded in the same manner. 1. Turn the ignition on.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced 2. Press and release the LOAD button.
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality 3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot,
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the to turn green.
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or 4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
try a known good CD. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught the display. If you select an equalization setting for your
in the CD player. CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD. As each new track starts to play, the track number will
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section. To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash and LOAD
ALL will appear on the display.
3-64
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load Playing a Specific Loaded CD
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in. For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will
you can load another CD. The CD player takes appear under the CD number that is playing, and the
up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six. track number will appear.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading later in this section.
CDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the loading
function. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject a
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on single CD or multiple CDs. To eject the CD that is
the display. If more than one CD has been loaded, currently playing, press and release this button. To eject
a number for each CD will appear on the display. If you multiple CDs, press and hold this button for two seconds.
select an equalization setting for your CD, it will be You will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you
activated each time you play a CD. know when a CD is being ejected.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can now
appear on the display. remove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back
into the receiver. If you try to push the CD back into the
receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,
the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the
CD several times before stopping.
3-65
Do not repeatedly press the CD button to eject a CD after RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject, • To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
25-second time period has elapsed.
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the • To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off and hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
then on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature and appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
enable CDs to be loaded into the player again. repeat play.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
a reduced volume. Release this button to play the CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear the following:
on the display.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to random order, press and release the RDM button.
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
a reduced volume. Release this button to play the RDM again to turn off random play.
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear • To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
on the display. in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
3-66
sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start of RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. current track has been playing. To change the default
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you on the display (track or elapsed time), press this
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
will continue moving backward or forward through knob until the display flashes. The selected display
the CD. will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold either
CD(s) is in the player. The inactive CD(s) will remain
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN safely inside the radio for future listening.
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, when listening to the radio.
to stop scanning.
Using Song List Mode
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
each CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, the following steps:
to stop scanning.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3-67
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right steps:
arrow button to locate the track that you want 1. Turn the CD player on.
to save. The track will begin to play.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or S-LIST will appear on the display.
more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
immediately. After two seconds of continuously track to be deleted.
pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will sound 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
to confirm that the track has been saved. seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display, if you try two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
to save more than 20 selections. been deleted.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the moved up the list. When another track is added to the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
the order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
3-68
To delete the entire song list, perform the following CD Messages
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display. • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed • You are driving on a very rough road. When the
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
appear on the display indicating that the song list
has been deleted. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically • There may have been a problem while burning
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song the CD.
list again are added to the bottom of the list. • The label may be caught in the CD player.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed try a known good CD.
from the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-69
Theft-Deterrent Feature Radio Reception
(Non-RDS Radios) AM
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
radio. The feature works automatically by learning especially at night. The longer range, however, can
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will pick up noise from things like storms and power lines.
not operate and LOC will appear on the display. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen. FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
Theft-Deterrent Feature will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
(RDS Radios) causing the sound to come and go.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning Care of Your CDs
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display. or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed. solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
if stolen. handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-70
Care of Your CD Player Chime Level Adjustment
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and LOUD
will appear on the display. To change back to the default
Fixed Mast Antenna or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes The chime level will change from the loud level to normal,
without being damaged. If the mast should ever and NORMAL will appear on the display. Each time the
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. chime volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it. example of the new volume selected. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened will disable vehicle chimes.
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-71
✍ NOTES
3-72
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Freeway Driving ...........................................4-33
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-34
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-35
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-36
Braking .........................................................4-6 Winter Driving ..............................................4-38
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Steering ........................................................4-9 Ice or Snow ..............................................4-42
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11 Towing ..........................................................4-45
Passing .......................................................4-12 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-45
Loss of Control .............................................4-13 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-45
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-50
Vehicle ....................................................4-14 Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-56
Driving at Night ............................................4-28 Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-56
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-29 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................4-56
City Driving ..................................................4-32 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-57
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These
Your Vehicle simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Defensive Driving Drunken Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
defensively. is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to
Please start with a very important safety device in your the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for every year.
Everyone on page 1-10. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” a vehicle:
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
• Judgment
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to • Muscular Coordination

be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what • Vision
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
• Attentiveness.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following Police records show that almost half of all motor
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
both city and rural driving. You never know when the these deaths are the result of someone who was
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
300,000 people injured.
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
4-2
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
consume the alcohol. BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb who consumes food just before or during drinking will
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) have a somewhat lower BAC level.
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
have a lower relative percentage of body water increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
level than a man of her same body weight will when collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
each has the same number of drinks. of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
States is 0.04 percent. take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and There is something else about drinking and driving that
how quickly the person drinks them. many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-4
Control of a Vehicle
{CAUTION: You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,

it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
Braking action involves perception time and That means better braking and longer brake life.
reaction time. If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
foot and do it. That is reaction time. stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
long as two or three seconds or more with another.
Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and Anti-lock Brake System
eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could electronic braking system that will help prevent a
be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough braking skid.
space between your vehicle and others is important. When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); this test is going on. This is normal.
tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. If there is a problem
with the anti-lock brake
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in system, this warning
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy light will stay on.
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is See Anti-Lock Brake
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool System Warning Light
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much on page 3-31.
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
4-6
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you Traction Control System (TCS)
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning
though you have anti-lock brakes. or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
Using Anti-Lock transmission to limit wheel spin.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel normal.
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
The TCS button is located on your instrument panel.

Press this button to turn the TCS off and on.
4-8
When the traction control system is turned off, an Steering
indicator light on the button will illuminate.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction Power Steering
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road If you lose power steering assist because the engine
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” it will take much more effort.
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. Steering Tips
TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions. Driving on Curves
But the system can upshift the transmission only as
high as the shift lever position you have chosen, so you It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
should use the lower gears only when necessary. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-22 the news happen on curves. Here is why:
and/or Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-26
for more information. Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION/FAULT will The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
be displayed on your Driver Information Center (DIC). it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
more information. will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
When this warning is displayed, the system will not limit you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. will understand this.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
you should always leave TCS on. But you can turn the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
system off if you ever need to. You should turn the which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking can control.
Your Vehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-42.
4-9
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Steering in Emergencies
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do There are times when steering can be more effective
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
those places. You can lose control. out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
want it to go, and slow down. room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should around the problem.
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under these. First apply your brakes.
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
wheels are straight ahead. on the space available.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
the object.
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
The fact that such emergency situations are always so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
at all times and wear safety belts properly. until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a following too closely reduces your area of vision,
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance.
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in not get too close. Time your move so you will be
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up for the
So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and to crossroads for situations that might affect and wait for another opportunity.
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait for a better time. wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might and check the blind spot.
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and Loss of Control
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough Let us review what driving experts say about what
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your happens when the three control systems (brakes,
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
and move back into the right lane. (Remember where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle has asked.
you just passed may seem to be farther away from In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
you than it really is.) and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on danger.
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle. Skidding
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
be slowing down or starting to turn. care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
can ease a little to the right. three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-13
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the Off-Road Driving with Your
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs. This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, Also, see Anti-Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4-6.
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive, you should
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery not drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited. Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking “Off-roading” means you have left the great North
(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is why
“mirrored surface” — and slow down when you have it is very important that you read this guide. You will find
any doubt. many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For {CAUTION:
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive the seatbacks can be thrown forward
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the during a sudden stop. You or your
spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
they should be? What are the local laws that apply to below the top of the seatbacks.
off-roading where you will be driving? If you do not know, • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
you should check with law enforcement people in the tossed about when driving over rough
area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be terrain. You or your passengers can be
sure to get the necessary permission. struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
Driving center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
There are some important things to remember about injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
how to load your vehicle. loads inside the cargo area, not on the
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward and low as possible.
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on You will find other important information in this manual.
the off-road terrain does not toss things around. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50 and Tires
on page 5-57.
4-15
Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
recreation. However, it also raises environmental to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
concerns. GM recognize these concerns and urge every route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
the environment: any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
have been specially set aside for public off-road vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations. can help quickly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through how to use it properly.
streams or over soft ground).
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving. It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), Off-road driving does require some new and different
camp stoves and lanterns. skills. Here is what we mean.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
combustible materials that could catch fire from the eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-16
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road Scanning the Terrain
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
in mind. At higher speeds: of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
• you approach things faster and you have less time to consider.
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
• you have less time to react. hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
obstacles. acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you
• you will need more distance for braking, especially may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed
since you are on an unpaved surface. acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
{CAUTION: be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
quick changes in direction can easily throw things to consider:
you out of position. This could cause you to • Is the path ahead clear?
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts. • Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-17
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep Driving on Off-Road Hills
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill.
if you are not prepared. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an
understanding of what your vehicle can and ca not do.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, There are some hills that simply can not be driven, no
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, matter how well built the vehicle.
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is {CAUTION:
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking. Many hills are simply too steep for any
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall.
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. If you drive down them, you can not control
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or your speed. If you drive across them, you
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment will roll over. You could be seriously injured
about what is safe and what is not. or killed. If you have any doubt about the
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any steepness, do not drive the hill.
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can Approaching a Hill
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
been drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2. descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.
4-18
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near Driving Uphill
the top, but you may not see this because the crest of
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs. Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill. • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places? • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the need, because you do not want your wheels to
surface cause tire slipping? start spinning or sliding.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you • Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
will not have to make turning maneuvers? If the path twists and turns, you might want to
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block find another route.
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and {CAUTION:
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
way to find out. Turning or driving across steep hills can be
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
4-19
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
of the hill. to stall, and I can not make it up the hill?
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more A: If this happens, there are some things you should
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
do, and there are some things you must not do.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the First, here is what you should do:
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
• Use your headlamps even during the day. it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic. brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
{CAUTION: slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
can cause an accident. There could be a parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another to PARK (P) (or shift to neutral if your vehicle has
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or a manual transmission) and restart the engine.
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking
and stay alert. brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as
possible in REVERSE (R).
4-20
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand • Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can
best that you back down the hill with your wheels not make it up the hill, you must back straight
straight rather than in the left or right direction. down the hill.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover. Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill
and decide I just can not do it. What should I do?
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill. A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in FIRST (1))
NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch, if you have and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get
a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of
and regain forward momentum. This will not work. the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly
and you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
4-21
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to {CAUTION:
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to Heavy braking when going down a hill can
maintain vehicle control? cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? This could cause loss of control and a
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly
when descending a hill and use a low gear
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? to keep vehicle speed under control.
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? Q: Are there some things I should not do when
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to driving down a hill?
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes them you could lose control and have a serious
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend accident.
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
4-22
• Never go downhill with the transmission in Driving Across an Incline
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal pressed
down with a manual transmission. This is called Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
the work and could overheat and fade. whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? • A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base
But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do. (the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
Apply the parking brake. the much more narrow track width (the distance
• Shift to PARK (P) (or to neutral with the manual between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
transmission) and, while still braking, restart the the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving
engine. across an incline puts more weight on the downhill
wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, rollover.
and drive straight down.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help. across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even
wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways,
downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit
something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and
roll over.
4-23
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut to slide downhill. What should I do?
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
{CAUTION: Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
Driving across an incline that is too steep will be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
make your vehicle roll over. You could be side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
seriously injured or killed. If you have any get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do roll over, you will be right in its path.
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-24
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels {CAUTION:
will not get good traction. You can not accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can
longer braking distances.
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you and you and your passengers could drown.
do not get stuck.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on Driving in Water
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp demand extreme caution.
turns or abrupt maneuvers. Find out how deep the water is before you drive
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. through it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control. hubs, axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that will not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get your axle and other vehicle parts.
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-26
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. After Off-Road Driving
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
your tailpipe is under water, you will never be able accumulations can be a fire hazard.
to start your engine. When you go through water, After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
you longer to stop. glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
{CAUTION: cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due
Driving through rushing water can be to off-road use. Refer to the maintenance schedule for
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your additional information.
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the ground from
under your tires, and you could lose traction
and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-29

for more information on driving through water.
4-27
Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce
the glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are
driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-28
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
not even aware of it. road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will
get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-29
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain going through some car washes can cause problems,
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
people walking. hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good
shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts {CAUTION:
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
to separate from the inserts. work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
4-30
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your Driving Through Flowing Water
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one
or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops {CAUTION:
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water If this happens, you and other vehicle
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
puddles or standing water, water can come in warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage about trying to drive through flowing water.
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
water, drive through them very slowly.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-57.
4-31
City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would
for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-33.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
4-32
Freeway Driving Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up
with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed
most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow
driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
4-33
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use Before Leaving on a Long Trip
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in must start when you are not fresh — such as after
your “blind” spot. a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain and shoes you can easily drive in.
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under will find experienced and able service experts in GM
any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
next exit. and willing to help if you need it.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. Here are some things you can check before a trip:
The exit speed is usually posted.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, Are all windows clean inside and outside?
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
are going slower than you actually are. • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
4-34
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for aware that it can happen.
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to Then here are some tips:
the recommended pressure?
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook comfortably cool interior.
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system? • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
Highway Hypnosis service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
on the highway as an emergency.
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let
it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-14 for information about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain. would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
4-36
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
{CAUTION: and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
to do all the work of slowing down. They could you stay in your own lane.
get so hot that they would not work well. You
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
would then have poor braking or even none
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have accident.
your engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill. • You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-37
Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-57.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.
4-38
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and maneuvers.
sand crews can get there.
4-39
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a

serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
4-40
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
{CAUTION: than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
base of your vehicle, especially any that is from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
again from time to time to be sure snow does every half hour or so until help comes.
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-41
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
Ice or Snow wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your For information about using tire chains on your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-72.
you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
caution. Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
{CAUTION: four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. If you have
traction control, turn the traction control system off. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. Then shift
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
can explode, and you or others could be gear (or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
injured. And, the vehicle can overheat. That or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
could cause an engine compartment fire or as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
other damage. When you are stuck, spin the you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
the speedometer. cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that
does not get you out after a few tries, you may need to be
towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your
vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
4-42
Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
4-43
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-44
Towing With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Towing Your Vehicle Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
Recreational Vehicle Towing See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome. • Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
The two most common types of recreational vehicle would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
towing are known as “dinghy (towing your vehicle want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly (towing be towed.
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
4-45
Dinghy Towing Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Use the following steps to tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground:
1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into position behind
the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
on the ground, the drivetrain components could roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
four wheels on the ground. others could be injured. Make sure the parking
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive case to NEUTRAL.
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-46
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See Dolly Towing
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more
information.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK. To prevent your battery
from draining while towing, remove the RDO BATT
and CLSTR fuses from the instrument panel fuse
block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach
your destination. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
After towing see “Shifting out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28. Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-47
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles 5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for instructions.
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the 6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
Ground) being towed is firmly attached to the towing
Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle from vehicle.
the front:
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the dolly. your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
3. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach from draining while towing, remove the RDO BATT
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and and CLSTR fuses from the instrument panel fuse
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach
4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or your destination See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
a manual transmission in FIRST (1). page 5-105 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle
is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
4-48
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or
a manual transmission in FIRST (1).
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle from
the rear: 5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-28 for instructions.
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the dolly.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
2. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to being towed is firmly attached to the towing
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to vehicle.
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle.
4-49
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle. {CAUTION:
from draining while towing, remove the RDO BATT Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
and CLSTR fuses from the instrument panel fuse the GVWR, or either the maximum front or
block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle
your destination See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on can break, and it can change the way your
page 5-105 for more information. vehicle handles. These could cause you to
After towing see “Shifting out of NEUTRAL” under lose control and crash. Also, overloading
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28. can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Loading Your Vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
4-50
The Tire and Loading Information is attached to the 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
driver’s side center pillar, below the door latch post. passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
Vehicle’s without a center pillar, extended cab models, 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
will have the Tire and Loading Information label attached cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
to the edge of the driver’s side third door, above the door if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
latch post. This label lists the number of people that will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
can be in your vehicle and the total weight it can carry. amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight. is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you the 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
size and recommended inflation pressure for the original cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
equipment tires on your vehicle. For more information may not safely exceed the available cargo
on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-57 and and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading from your trailer will be transferred to your
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
tire size and recommended inflation pressures needed to this reduces the available cargo and luggage load
obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the capacity of your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-57 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety,
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit and trailering tips.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
4-51
Example 1 Example 2
Loading Your Vehicle Loading Your Vehicle

Item Description Total Item Description Total
Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
A 1,000 lbs. (453 kg) A 1,000 lbs. (453 kg)
Weight for Example 1 = Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight 300 lbs. (136 kg) B Weight 750 lbs. (340 kg)
150 lbs. (68 kg) x 2 = 150 lbs. (68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo Available Cargo
C 700 lbs. (317 kg) C 250 lbs. (113 kg)
Weight = Weight =
4-52
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle

Item Description Total
Vehicle Capacity
A 1,000 lbs. (453 kg)
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant The Certification/Tire label is attached to the bottom
B Weight 1,000 lbs. (453 kg) section of the center pillar, on the driver’s side of
200 lbs. (91 kg) x 5 = the vehicle. Vehicles without a center pillar, extended
cab models, will have the Certification/Tire label
Available Cargo attached to the edge of the driver’s side, third door,
C 0 lbs. (0 kg)
Weight = below the door latch post. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
4-53
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if {CAUTION:
pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a break, and it can change the way your vehicle
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can handles. These could cause you to lose
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load control and crash. Also, overloading can
equally on both sides of the centerline. shorten the life of your vehicle.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s Certification/
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details.
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-54
Payload
{CAUTION: This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can
carry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupants
as part of your load. If you added any accessories
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
or equipment after your vehicle left the factory,
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, remember to subtract the weight of these things from
or in a crash. the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
• Put things in the cargo area of your Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight rating
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them Two-Tiered Loading
are above the tops of the seats.
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across the
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint width of the pickup box, you can create an upper
in your vehicle. load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup
• When you carry something inside the box depressions. The length of the planks must allow
vehicle, secure it whenever you can. for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless each end of the plank.
you need to. When using this upper load platform, be sure the load
is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The
load’s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone
There’s also important loading information for off-road
over the rear axle.
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp
Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-14. area must be properly marked according to local laws
and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
4-55
Add-On Equipment Trailer Recommendations
When you carry removable items, you may need to You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for your
put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached,
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you so that you won’t go over the GVWR or the GAWR.
buy and install the new equipment.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your correct hitch and trailer brakes.
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-57
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight later in this section.
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Truck-Camper Loading Information
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners
Your vehicle was not designed to carry a slide-in may consider having the pickup box removed and a
camper. commercial or recreational body installed. However,
we recommend that conversions of this type not be
done to pickups. Owners should be aware that,
as manufactured, there are differences between a
chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which
may affect vehicle safety. For specific information
on this pickup, contact GM Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
4-56
Towing a Trailer Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
{CAUTION: dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
If you do not use the correct equipment and To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your
drive properly, you can lose control when you vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
even at all. You and your passengers could it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
have followed all the steps in this section. changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
Ask your dealer for advice and information and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
about towing a trailer with your vehicle. correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-57
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Three important considerations have to do with weight:
If you do, here are some important points: • the weight of the trailer,
• There are many different laws, including speed limit • the weight of the trailer tongue
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure • and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for Weight of the Trailer
this information can be state or provincial police.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls. It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, important. And, it can also depend on any special
axle or other parts could be damaged. equipment that you have on your vehicle.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you The following chart shows how much your trailer can
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
the heavier loads.
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
• You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering
loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual capacity. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” next.
transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s
better not to use the highest gear.
4-58
Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**
2WD Regular Cab
Automatic Transmission, 3.73 3,500 lbs. (1 587 kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
Manual Transmission, 3.42 2,000 lbs. ( 907 kg) 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
2.8 L Engine
Manual Transmission, 3.73 2,500 lbs. (1 133 kg) 6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine

2WD Extended Cab
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
4-59
3.5 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine 3.73 3,600 lbs. (1 633 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)

®
2WD Crew Cab
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine 3.73 4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
4-60
4WD Regular Cab
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
4-61
4WD Extended Cab
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
4-62
®
4WD Crew Cab
2.8 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
2.8 L Engine
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the In Canada, write to:
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle General Motors of Canada Limited
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
not be exceeded. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
4-63
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-50 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 500 lbs. (226 kg) with a weight
carrying hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for
your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will
position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help
reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some of the items around in the trailer.
4-64
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper You should always attach chains between your vehicle
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
door above the door latch, or see Loading Your Vehicle contacting the road if it becomes separated from
on page 4-50. Then be sure you don’t go over the the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
trailer tongue. manufacturer. For trailers up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg)
you may attach the safety chains to the attaching points
Hitches on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer
or hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
to drag on the ground.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
You can use your step bumper hitch for trailers up to
2,000 lbs. (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs. (90 kg)
tongue weight.
Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your
bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make
sure you have ample room when turning to avoid
contact between the trailer and the bumper.
4-65
Trailer Brakes Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
loaded, then it needs its own brake–and they must be Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
adjust and maintain them properly. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems the brakes are working. This lets you check your
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes. electrical connection at the same time.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper brakes are still working.
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
4-66
Following Distance When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Passing When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
have someone guide you. bulbs are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
4-67
Driving On Grades Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much {CAUTION:
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, You really should not park your vehicle, with
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your wrong, your rig could start to move. People
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar trailer can be damaged.
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied) how to do it:
for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If you
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
do get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
on page 5-28.
transmission. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4-68
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your Maintenance When Trailer Towing
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. See Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more information. pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,
NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
more information. covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
6. Release the regular brakes. them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you start your trip.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
Parking on a Hill are tight.
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-69
✍ NOTES
4-70
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Cooling System ............................................5-30
Adding Equipment to the Outside Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-36
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-39
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-42
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Jump Starting ...............................................5-43
Additives .......................................................5-6 Rear Axle .......................................................5-47
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7 Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-48
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Headlamps ..................................................5-50
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17 Running Lamps .........................................5-52
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-53
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-22 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Hydraulic Clutch (Manual Transmission) ...........5-24 Back-up Lamps .........................................5-53
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-54
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-27 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-55
5-1
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-57 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-99
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-64 Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-101
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65 Finish Damage ...........................................5-101
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67 Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-102
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68 Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-102
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-69 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-102
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-70 Vehicle Identification .....................................5-104
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-104
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72 Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-104
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74 Electrical System ..........................................5-104
Spare Tire ...................................................5-94 Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-104
Appearance Care ............................................5-95 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-105
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-95 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-105
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-98 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-105
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-98 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-109
5-2
Service California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
and GM-trained and supported service people.
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. and some component wear by-products contain
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: and/or emit these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you will {CAUTION:
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual You can be injured and your vehicle could be
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service damaged if you try to do service work on a
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12. vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air experience, the proper replacement parts
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74. and tools before you attempt any vehicle
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and maintenance task.
list the mileage and the date of any service work • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17. other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
Gasoline Octane of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get improved driveability and emission control system
a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, performance compared to other gasoline.
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
In Canada, look for the
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill
label on the pump.
is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you
are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California gasoline.
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
specifications, but emission control system performance recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may they comply with the specifications described earlier.
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-32 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts.
by your warranty. That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
Additives emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
are now required to contain additives that will help (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
forming, allowing your emission control system to not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
work properly. You should not have to add anything to containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the performance of the emission control system may
the minimum amount of additive required to meet be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel {CAUTION:
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
be covered by your warranty. cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or and others, read and follow all the instructions
contact a major oil company that does business in the on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
country where you will be driving. you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-7
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged door While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
on the driver’s side of your vehicle. hook on the fuel filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill your
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
{CAUTION: pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-99 Cleaning the
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out Outside of Your Vehicle. When filling the tank do not
overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the pump
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
shuts off.
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
Then unscrew the cap all the way. sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. If the fuel cap is not properly installed,
FUEL CAP will appear on the DIC and the check engine
{CAUTION: light will be lit on instrument panel cluster. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 and Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-32 for more information.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
shutting off the pump or by notifying the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
station attendant. Leave the area immediately. the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-32.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
{CAUTION:
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
You can be badly burned and your vehicle and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
to you and others: and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Hood Release 4. Release the hood prop
from its retainer and
To open the hood, do the following: put the hood prop into
the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on
the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
1. Pull the handle located inside the vehicle on return the prop to its retainer.
the lower left side of the instrument panel. Then, lower the hood down to close. It will latch when
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. dropped from about 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
The secondary latch is located below the without pressing on the hood.
front center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.8 L engine, you’ll see:
2.8 L engine shown. 3.5 L engine similar
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See Windshield Washer M. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
Fluid on page 5-38. on page 5-43.
B. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant N. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses and
on page 5-25. Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on Engine Oil
page 5-36.
D. Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic Checking Engine Oil
Transmission Fluid on page 5-19 and Manual
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22. It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-39.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42. Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped). the location of the engine oil dipstick.
See Hydraulic Clutch (Manual Transmission) Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
on page 5-24. drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/ dipstick might not show the actual level.
Filter on page 5-17.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
K. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System keeping the tip down, and check the level.
on page 5-30.
L. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-43.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area (L), then the way back in when you are through.
you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must
use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-109. Look for two things:
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine • GM6094M
has so much oil that the oil level gets above Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
operating range, your engine could be damaged. only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-14
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle. However, if it is going to
be 0°F (–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not
available, you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these

requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,

and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting When to Change Engine Oil
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines (GM Oil Life System)
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
oil can result in engine damage not covered by when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
your warranty. on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
your vehicle. at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 When the system has calculated that oil life has been
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
easier cold starting and better protection for your A CHANGE OIL message will come on. Change your oil
engine at extremely low temperatures. as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for
fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
Engine Oil Additives conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance has GM-trained people who will perform this work using
and engine protection. genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the CHANGE OIL Message What to Do with Used Oil
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
message being turned on, reset the system. rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the CHANGE Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
OIL message, do the following: change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC. filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
2. Press and hold the reset stem. The oil life will streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
change to 100% and a beep will sound. it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
3. Turn the key to LOCK. properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer,
a service station or a local recycling center for help.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when
you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has
not reset. Repeat the procedure. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located on the
passenger’s side of the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-17
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(24 140 km), and replace at 25,000 miles (40 000 km).
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
To remove the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 to
determine which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten
the clips to hold the cover in place.
5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION: When to Check and Change
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
off can cause you or others to be burned. level is when the engine oil is changed.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
there and the engine backfires, you could be more of these conditions:
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful • In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
working on the engine with the air cleaner/ regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
filter off. • In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
can easily get into your engine, which will damage service.
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
when you are driving. conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
5-19
How to Check A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
choose to have this done at the dealership service run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
department. 50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate Checking the Fluid Level
reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving: • Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). running.
• At high speed for quite a while. • With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• In heavy traffic—especially in hot weather. • With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
• While pulling a trailer. lever through each gear range, pausing for about
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F lever in PARK (P).
(82°C to 93°C). • Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles or more.
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
5-20
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission
dipstick handle has
this symbol on it.
The transmission dipstick is located toward the rear of

the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
on page 5-12 for more information on location. below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
hot check.
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
and then pull it back out again.
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-21
How to Add Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended When to Check
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) doesn’t require changing.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot How to Check
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill. choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled service department.
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
made especially for your automatic transmission. here, or you could get a false reading.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate
described under “How to Check” listed previously. reading if you check your transmission fluid.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
handle down to lock the dipstick in place. is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
5-22
Then, follow these steps: How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
5-23
Hydraulic Clutch When to Check and What to Use
(Manual Transmission)
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir
is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch

fluid reservoir cap
has this symbol on it.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid See Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 and
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Adding fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-24
How to Check and Add Fluid A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in • Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Engine Coolant • Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with • Let the warning lights and gages work as
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed they should.
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant. cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
The following explains your cooling system and how
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
on page 5-28.
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-25
What to Use Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and to improve the system. These can be harmful.
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, Checking Coolant
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant. The coolant recovery tank is located toward the rear
of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your for more information on location.
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
5-26
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL not to spill it.
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm,
the level should be above the FULL COLD level.
Adding Coolant {CAUTION:
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. see Cooling System on page 5-30.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Radiator Pressure Cap
Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator are hot. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
5-27
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your {CAUTION:
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-32. Steam from an overheated engine can burn
Your air conditioning may stop working if your engine you badly, even if you just open the hood.
is too hot. This is normal and helps cool the engine. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you

keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-28
If No Steam Is Coming From Your If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
Engine If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or normally.
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: vehicle right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day. If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
• Stop after high-speed driving. three minutes while you’re parked. Push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
• Idle for long periods in traffic. as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
Towing a Trailer on page 4-57. engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so: You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at

least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank C. Radiator
B. Engine Cooling Fan Pressure Cap
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-30
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
If you do, you can be burned. or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.

The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator
pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Recovery Tank Use the recommended coolant and the proper
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level coolant mixture.
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others {CAUTION:
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-32
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system,
including the upper
radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise

about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap to remove it.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-34
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
FULL COLD mark. upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, engine cooling fan.
but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
to secure it tightly.
5-35
Engine Fan Noise Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located near the

front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for power steering fluid reservoir location.
5-36
When to Check Power Steering Fluid The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering up to the proper range.
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system What to Use
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment and seals.
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
What to Use follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
has sufficient protection against freezing. of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
Open the cap with the
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
washer symbol on it.
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
Compartment Overview windshield washer. It can damage your washer
on page 5-12 for reservoir system and paint.
location.
5-38
Brakes leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
Brake Fluid sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 fluid only when work is done on the brake
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir. in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is on page 6-4.
5-39
Checking Brake Fluid Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. from entering the reservoir.
Just look at the brake
fluid reservoir. The fluid
level should be above MIN.
{CAUTION:
If it is not have your
brake system checked to With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
see if there is a leak. system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over brake system can damage brake system parts so
the MAX mark. badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
What to Add • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
If you do, wash it off immediately. See
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Appearance Care on page 5-95.
on page 6-13.
5-40
Brake Wear Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if you
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums
is moving (except when you are pushing on the should be removed and inspected each time the tires
brake pedal firmly). are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the
front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
{CAUTION: Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
Brake Pedal Travel
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake Brake Adjustment

pads could result in costly brake repair.
Every time you make a brake stop, your brakes adjust
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake for wear.
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
5-41
Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle the battery. This will help keep your battery from
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. running down.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
{CAUTION:
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
between your front and rear brakes can change — for that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
the worse. The braking performance you have come to are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-43
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts for tips on working around a battery without
in the wrong replacement brake parts. getting hurt.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, vehicle for longer storage periods.
get one that has the replacement number shown on the Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco® Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-70 or
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-70.
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-42
Jump Starting Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12–volt
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your battery with a negative ground system.
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
{CAUTION: be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
because:
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
• They contain acid that can burn you. connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
• They contain gas that can explode start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
or ignite. damage the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
burn you. the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
or all of these things can hurt you. transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
5-43
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered {CAUTION:
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. Using a match near a battery can cause battery
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette this, and some have been blinded. Use a
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off flashlight if you need more light.
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it Be sure the batteries have enough water.
could save your radio! You do not need to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
on page 5-12 for more information on location of add water to take care of that first. If you do
the battery. not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose

or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll vehicle has one.
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-45
7. Don’t let the other end Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
touch metal. Connect next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
it to the positive (+) doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
terminal of the good heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
positive (+) terminal if dead battery.
the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
8. Now connect the black run the engine for awhile.
negative (−) cable 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
to the negative (−) If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
terminal of the good service.
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
the vehicle has one. wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
5-46
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal B. Good Battery
plug hole.
Engine Part C. Dead Battery
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, What to Use
do the following: See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the other vehicle.
5-47
Four-Wheel Drive To get and accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level service.
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that you’ll need to add some lubricant. Remove the plug and
need lubrication. add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom
of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
Transfer Case the plug.
When to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Additional Required Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
Services on page 6-6. kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-48
Front Axle If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When to Check and Change Lubricant When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid plug hole.
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. When the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
Have it inspected and repaired. add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on

a level surface.
5-49
Bulb Replacement Headlamps
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-54 for the proper Composite Headlamp System
types of bulbs to use. For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service
department.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to A. Low-Beam Headlamp B. High-Beam Headlamp
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package. To replace the bulbs, do the following:
1. Open and support the hood. See Hood Release
on page 5-11.
2. Access the bulb/sockets from the engine
compartment.
5-50
Sealed Beam Headlamps
To replace the headlamp capsule, do the following:
1. Remove the four retainer screws and the retainer.
2. Pull the headlamp capsule toward you and
unplug the electrical connector.
3. Plug the electrical connector into the new headlamp
capsule.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it

straight out of the headlamp housing.
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
5. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb.
Use care not to touch the new bulb with your
bare hand or anything damp or oily.
6. Place the connector with the new bulb into the
headlamp housing and turn it clockwise until
it is tight.
5-51
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and 4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5. Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.
Daytime Running Lamps
6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp housing and
turn it clockwise until it is tight.
1. Remove the turn signal/parking lamp/daytime

running lamp (DRL) assembly by pressing on the
release clip on the outboard side of the housing and 7. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parking
pulling the outboard end of the lamp toward you. lamp/DRL housing over the small post in the grille.
2. Pull the inboard side of the lamp out from the small 8. Align the release clip of the lamp assembly with the
post in the grille. square opening in the grille, and push the outboard
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove side of the lamp assembly in, until the release
it from the lamp housing. clip snaps into place.
5-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
(CHMSL) and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-11.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate
latch and pull out the
lamp assembly.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove it from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Insert the new bulb into the socket and press it in
until tight.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the housing and turn
until tight.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
5-53
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp Replacement Bulbs
B. Turn Signal
C. Back-up Lamp Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 912
(CHMSL)
Composite Headlamps 9006
Low-Beam
High-Beam 9005
Headlamps, Sealed-Beam H6054

Park/ Front Turn Signal/Daytime 7157A
Running Lamps (DRL)
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove Parking Lamps (Inboard) 3157A
it from the taillamp housing. Stoplamps, Rear Turn Signals,
Taillamps, and Back-Up Lamps 3057
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it is tight.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
7. Close the tailgate.
5-54
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” under Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle on page 5-99 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper A. Blade Assembly D. Blade Pivot
arm until it locks into a vertical position. B. Arm Assembly E. Hook Slot
C. Locking Tab F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release
it from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
5-55
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic A. Claw in Notch C. Incorrect Installation
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully B. Correct Installation
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom 6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
locked on both sides of the insert slots. the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-56
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet could cause serious injury. Check all tires
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual. frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
{CAUTION: cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
are dangerous. • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
• Overloading your tires can cause If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
overheating as a result of too much friction. have been damaged, replace them.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
5-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a compact spare tire sidewall.
P-Metric Tire Example

5-58
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combination (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of letters and numbers used to define a particular of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration (F) UTQG (Uniform Tire Quality Grading): Tire
later in this section for more detail. manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to Quality Grading on page 5-69.
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
guidelines. needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department
of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) TIN (Tire Identification Number): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
5-59
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See “Compact Spare Tire”
under Spare Tire on page 5-94 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 5-73.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) TIN (Tire Identification Number): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-50.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
Compact Spare Tire Example

5-60
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
type and service description. The letter “T” as the the first character in the tire size means a passenger
first character in the tire size means the tire is for vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S.
temporary use only. Tire and Rim Association.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
guidelines. if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
Tire Size is 75% as high as it is wide.
The following examples show the different parts of a (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
tire size. indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
he load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure without passengers and cargo.
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa). DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
conditioning. brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
its width. Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the mounted on a vehicle.
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64. trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-62
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
of a tire. vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of centerline of the tread.
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants
a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50. the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical can operate.
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears surface. The amount of grip provided.
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
other sidewall of the tire. with the road.
5-63
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes Inflation - Tire Pressure
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67. inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
a tire information system that provides consumers with See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-50, for the location
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
Grading on page 5-69. don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
• Too much flexing
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle • Too much heat
on page 4-50. • Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an • Bad wear
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, • Bad handling
occupant weight and cargo weight. • Bad fuel economy
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size you can get the following:
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading • Unusual wear
Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-64
When to Check Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more. Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. (8 000 to 13 000 km).
If you have a compact spare tire, it should be Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
at 60 psi (420 kPa). soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for
How to Check New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel Replacement on
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire page 5-70 for more information.
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. cold means a Flat Tire on page 5-74.
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
is the most important, see Scheduled Maintenance
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
on page 6-4.
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-65
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
rotation patterns shown here. scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing
that does not match your vehicle’s road tires and wheels, a Flat Tire” in the Index.
in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For the location of the tire
and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-50. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109 for the
proper wheel nut torque specification.
5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
One way to tell when it’s • You can see the indicators at three or more places
time for new tires is to around the tire.
check the treadwear • You can see cord or fabric showing through the
indicators, which will
tire’s rubber.
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
(1.6 mm) or less of deep enough to show cord or fabric.
tread remaining. • The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have • The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
treadwear indicators. can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-67
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look {CAUTION:
at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
page 4-50, for examples of these labels and where they while driving. If you mix tires of different
can be found on your vehicle. sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
GM recommends that you get tires with that same use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and (if you have one). It was developed for use on
other things during normal service on your vehicle. your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, {CAUTION:
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
section width. For example: conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
The following information relates to the system depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
developed by the United States National Highway however, and may depart significantly from the norm
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. differences in road characteristics and climate.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most Traction – AA, A, B, C
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
While the tires available on General Motors passenger traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
grades, they must also conform to federal safety traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
requirements and additional General Motors Tire cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-69
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested and best overall performance.
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
a level of performance which all passenger car tires vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety may need to be rebalanced.
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel Wheel Replacement
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
established for a tire that is properly inflated and rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
excessive loading, either separately or in combination, replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
5-70
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
the same way as the one it replaces.
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
information.
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts Used Replacement Wheels
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
dangerous. It could affect the braking and or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
air and make you lose control. You could have wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-71
Tire Chains
{CAUTION: instructions. To help avoid damage to your

vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/75R15 or don’t spin your wheels.
P235/50R17 size tires, do not use tire chains.
They can damage your vehicle because there is If you do find traction devices that will fit,
not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a install them on the rear tires.
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the P225/75R15, P265/75R15 or P235/50R17, use
tire chains could cause you to lose control of tire chains only where legal and only when you
your vehicle and you or others may be injured must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
in a crash. tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not
Use another type of traction device only if its use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
vehicle and tire size combination and road manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
CAUTION: (Continued) them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving, {CAUTION:
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
tips about what to expect and what to do: the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. anything else, you or others could be badly
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like for changing a flat tire.
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-73
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
on page 3-6 for more information. the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
vehicle.
change a tire.
5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The tools you will need are under the passenger’s seat.
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are
under the driver’s side rear seat. For regular and
extended cab vehicles the jack and wheel blocks are
located under the cover at the center of the vehicle
behind the front seats.
1. The vehicle will
have a cover if it
is an extended or
regular cab.
Crew Cab
Regular and
Extended Cab
5-75
2. Move the seats forward and turn the wing nut on
the cover counterclockwise to remove it. For crew
cab models, reach under the rear seat to access
the jack and wheel blocks. To reinstall the jack
and wheel block assembly in the mounting bracket,
insert the tabs into the jack base by pushing the
blocks up into the assembly. The outer hole in
the jack base aligns with the tab on the bracket.
When reinstalling, make sure the jack is secure,
but do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.
3. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer
can be removed by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at A. Jack Handle Extensions D. Wheel Wrench
the opposite end of the vehicle. B. Bottle Jack E. Wheel Blocks
4. There is also a wing nut used to retain the storage C. Extension Tool
bag and tools located under the front passenger’s 1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the jack
seat. To remove it, turn the wing nut handle extensions (A) as shown.
counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
5-76
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See “Secondary Latch System”
later in this section.
4. When the tire has
been lowered, tilt
the retainer and
slide it up the cable
so it can be pulled
up through the
2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of the extension wheel opening.
tool through the hole in the rear bumper and into
the funnel-shaped guide. The chiseled end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of

the wheel wrench (E) in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
The tools you will be using include the bottle jack (A),
the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the
jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-78
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Front Location
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
5-79
Front Location Rear Location
3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown.
5-80
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Front Location Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
the jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
off of the frame.
jack lift head into the proper location before
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under raising the vehicle.
the rear axle and get as close as possible to the
shock absorber.
5-81
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,
Rear Position mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
5-82
8. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
{CAUTION: nuts back on with
the rounded end of
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to the nuts toward
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts the wheel. Tighten
each wheel nut
become loose after a time. The wheel could
by hand. Then use
come off and cause an accident. When you the wheel wrench
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from to tighten the nuts
the places where the wheel attaches to the until the wheel is
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth held against the hub.
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
5-83
Front Position Rear Position
9. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-84
10. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a CAUTION: (Continued)
crisscross sequence
as shown by turning
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the wheel wrench
clockwise. the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead

to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
{CAUTION: nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications”
in the index for the wheel nut torque specification.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and even come off. This could lead to an and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
5-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire
carrier. Use the art and text following to help you.
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire

under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem 1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired with the valve stem pointed down.
as soon as possible.
5-86
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel

opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
5-87
4. Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the tire part
A. Push and Pull on Tire B. Turn Tire
way up. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel
opening and the valve stem is pointed down. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves,
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise check to make sure the tire valve stem is pointing
until you feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten down, then use the wheel wrench to loosen
the cable. and then tighten the cable.
5-88
Return the wheel wrench and jack extensions and the A. Bottle Jack
storage bag to the location under the front passenger’s B. Wheel Blocks
seat. Reinstall the jack and wheel blocks, be sure to
install the wheel blocks first. Secure the items in C. Wing Nut
the vehicle as shown.
Regular and
Extended Cab
Crew Cab
A. Bottle Jack C. Wing Nut
B. Wheel Blocks
5-89
Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do
the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and
Tools” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below. 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end
fitting is visible.
5-90
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible proceed to Step 6. 6. Stand the wheel
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning blocks on their
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks shortest ends, with
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. the backs facing
each other.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
5-91
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench 11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of
to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper. Turn the wheel counterclockwise one turn or
Position the center lift point of the jack under the until the wheel retainer assembly falls out.
wheel.
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
lifts the tire. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary
latch has released and the tire is balancing on
the jack.
5-92
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and

carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand. 14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into the under the vehicle.
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel 15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up.
rest of the way. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” earlier in
this section.
5-93
Spare Tire Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
Compact Spare Tire other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Using them can damage your vehicle and can
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
60 psi (420 kPa). your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you Full-Size Spare Tire
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-size spare tire,
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) which, when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire,
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can whether compact–size or full–size, may lose air over
finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See
replaced where you want. For heavy payloads or towing, Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64 and Loading Your
and for low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions, Vehicle on page 4-50 for information regarding proper
repair or replace the full-size tire, and reinstall for best tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on
performance. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see
with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.
will last longer and be in good shape in case you need After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
it again. stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught will be available in case you need it again.
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle. Don’t mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
5-94
Appearance Care • Lacquer Thinner
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
• Nail Polish Remover
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a They can all be hazardous — some more than
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your Do not use any of these unless this manual says
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
and instructions. And always open your doors or windows • Alcohol
when you are cleaning the inside.
• Laundry Soap
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
• Bleach
• Gasoline
• Reducing Agents
• Benzene
• Naphtha Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
• Carbon Tetrachloride
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
• Acetone loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
5-95
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet Using Cleaner on Fabric
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very loose dirt.
well. You can get GM- approved cleaning products from 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
on page 5-102.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
Here are some cleaning tips:
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. the material and don’t rub it roughly.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
they set. sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain. 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a towel or cloth.
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
stains are stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-96
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), Use warm water and a clean cloth.
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine • Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
and blood can be removed as follows:
You may have to do this more than once.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, Cleaning Leather
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution: Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking sold to 1 cup (250 ml) or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
of lukewarm water. let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
4. Let dry. • For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili • Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. • Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
completely. it can harm the leather.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-97
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Care of Safety Belts
Panel Keep belts clean and dry.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the {CAUTION:
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
soap and lukewarm water.
surface finish.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or Weatherstrips
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102. longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when six months. During very cold, damp weather
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could more frequent application may be required. See
scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
rear window defogger and the integrated radio
antenna. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
5-98
Cleaning the Outside of Your Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Vehicle Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Finish Care
Washing Your Vehicle
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or Materials on page 5-102.
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
removing all soap residue completely. You can get The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102. non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, finish.
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
scratches and water spotting. polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-99
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., Blades
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather do not form when you rinse it with water.
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
whenever possible. vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep replace blades that look worn.
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed may then be applied.
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
5-100
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted Sheet Metal Damage
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
them because you could damage the surface. Do not applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires Finish Damage

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
products on your vehicle may damage the paint expense.
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
surfaces on your vehicle. materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
5-101
Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
exhaust system even though they have corrosion and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
protection. surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
the frame should be loosened before being flushed. 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can whichever occurs first.
do this for you.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description Usage
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
Wax-Treated polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Removes tar, road oil
Oil Remover and asphalt.
5-102
Description Usage Description Usage
Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or Foaming Tire Shine Cleans, shines and
and Polish stainless steel. Low Gloss protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
White Sidewall Removes soil and black
Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Cleans vinyl tops, Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Vinyl Cleaner upholstery and Biodegradable and
convertible tops. phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, Quickly and easily

smoke and fingerprints. removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter from carpets, vinyl and
Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime cloth upholstery.
from chrome wheels and
Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers. Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
Removes dust, vinyl, leather and carpet.
Finish Enhancer fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on See your General Motors parts department for these
wipe off. products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches

and protects finish.
5-103
Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through Electrical System
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Add-On Electrical Equipment
Engine Identification Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
and replacement parts.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74.
5-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools. breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, caused by electrical problems.
be sure to get it fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
Power Windows and Other Power replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Options
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the that you can get along without — like the radio or
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power and Heated Seat Circuit
Breakers
There is a circuit breaker located underneath the
driver’s side front seat that controls the power and
heated seat functions.
5-105
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuse Usage
1 Brake Switch, Stoplamps
2 Auxiliary Power 1
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
5 Air Conditioning Control Head
driver’s side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more 8 Wiper/Washer Switch
information on location of the engine compartment 9 Fog Lamps
fuse block.
10 Ignition Transducers
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of the
cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the tab and 11 Driver’s Side Headlamp
push down on the cover until the tab clicks into place. 12 Passenger’s Side Headlamp
13 Fuel Pump
14 Wiper
15 Front Axle Actuator
5-106
Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
Antilock Brake System (ABS), Driver’s Side RearTaillamp,
16 ABS module, Four-Wheel Drive, 29 Passenger Side Air Bag Indicator
Gravity Sensor Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming
Power (2WD/4WD switch lighting)
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
17 System, Sensing and Diagnostic 30 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B
Module, Air Bag Off Switch
31 OnStar
18 Heated Seat
32 Radio
Cruise Control Switch, Inside
Rearview Mirror, Transfer Case 33 Auxiliary Power 2
19 Control Module, Brake Switch, 34 Truck Body Controller
Clutch Disable
35 Horn
20 Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
36 Transfer Case Control Module
21 Power Door Locks
37 Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo
22 Injectors Lamps/Mirrors
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch, 38 Cluster
23 Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,
Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning 39 Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’s
Relay Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
24 Transmission Solenoid Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver
40 and Passenger’s Side Power
25 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Window Switches Lighting
26 Back-up Lights 41 Climate Control Fan
27 ERLS, Map Sensor, Can Purge 42 Power Windows
Solenoid
43 Starter Solenoid Relay
28 Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
5-107
Fuse Usage Relays Usage
44 Antilock Brake System 2 54 Driver and Passenger’s

(ABS Pump) Headlamps Fuse
45 Antilock Brake System 1 55 Horn

(ABS Logic)
Electronic Throttle Control Fuse,
Power Seat Circuit Breaker/ 56 Oxygen Sensor Fuse
46 POA Seat
57 Wipers (On/Off)
69 Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
Power Window Fuse, Wiper/Washer
72 Not Used 58 Switch Fuse, (Retained Accessory
Power Mode)
73 Not Used
59 Ignition 3, Climate Control,
74 Not Used Climate Control Head Fuse
75 Not Used Run/Crank, Air Bag System Fuse,
77 Air Conditioning Compressor 61 Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, ERLS,
79 Oxygen Sensors Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse
62 Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
Relays Usage 63 Wiper 2 (High/Low)
47 Beam Selection
50 Air Conditioning Compressor Miscellaneous Usage
51 Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Fuse 64 Diode — Wiper
52 Fog Lamps 65 Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
Front Parking Lamp Fuse, 66 Mega Fuse
53 Driver and Passenger’s Taillamp
Fuse, Rear Parking Lamps 67 Not Used
5-108
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications

Capacities
Application English Metric
Air Conditioning Capacity
1.6 lbs 1.73 kg
Refrigerant R-134a
Cooling System 10.4 quarts 9.8 L

2.8 L Engine
10.6 quarts 10.0 L
3.5 L Engine
Differential Fluid 3.4-3.8 pints 1.6-1.8 L

Rear Axle
3.2 pints 1.5 L
Front Axle
Engine Oil with Filter 5 quarts 4.7 L

2.8 L
6 quarts 5.6 L
3.5 L
5-109
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application English Metric
Fuel Tank 19.5 gallons 76 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 quarts 4.7 L

Automatic
2.5 quarts 2.4 L
Manual
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb-ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Type VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.8 L 4L60E Automatic
8 0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
LK5 AR5 Manual
3.5 L 4L60E Automatic
6 0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
L52 AR5 Manual
5-110
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
change as recommended. affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
for details. drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
Maintenance Requirements other ways.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, Because of all the different ways people use their
replacement parts and recommended fluids and vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary frequent checks and replacements. So please read
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. the following and note how you drive. If you have any
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
maintenance may not be covered by warranty. see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended {CAUTION:
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-50. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
driving limits.
maintenance work only if you have the
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner. required know-how and the proper tools and
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
Vehicle on page 4-14. see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane qualified technician do the work.
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
should be performed when indicated. See Additional unless you are technically qualified and have the
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
should be checked, when to check it and what you you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good (5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
condition. the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on the Engine
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement When the CHANGE OIL light appears, certain services,
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced, checks and inspections are required. Required services
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of first service be Maintenance I, your second service be
genuine GM parts. Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and
Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
When the CHANGE OIL light comes on, it means that OIL light comes on within ten months since vehicle was
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at or more since the last service or if the light has not
least once a year and at this time the system must be come on at all for one year.
reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13. An Emission Control Service. • •
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
• •
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-57. • •
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
• •
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers) (41 500) (83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
• • • • • •
or leaks.
Replace fuel filter. • • • • • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
• • • • • •
page 5-17. An Emission Control
Service.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). • • •
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
•
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
•
Control Service.
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers) (41 500) (83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
•
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
•
An Emission Control Service.
Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
California Air Resources Board has determined that the for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify etc. Visually check constant velocity joints, rubber boots
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to and axle seals for leaks.
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
urge that all recommended maintenance services be are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
performed at the indicated intervals and the fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
maintenance be recorded. needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
drum brake linings for wear or cracks. Inspect disc brake recommended at least once a year.
pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect
other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake
adjustment.
6-7
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
are working properly. Look for any other loose or conditions:
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air − When doing frequent trailer towing.
bag system does not need regular maintenance.) − Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door and fuel service.
door hinges, latches and locks (including glove box (i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
and console doors), hood latch assembly, secondary Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl and any Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
moving seat hardware. Lubricate hood safety lever Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
pivot and prop rod pivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle
assembly pivot points and hinges. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
6-8
Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and add
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
dependability and emission control performance of your Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
with these checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
It is important to perform these underhood checks at inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
each fuel fill. your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check securely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turn
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further Flat Tire on page 5-74.
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
At Least Once a Year 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
Starter Switch Check in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench
dealer for service.
{CAUTION: On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
When you are doing this inspection, the only when the clutch is pushed down all the way
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch
moves, you or others could be injured. is not pushed all the way down, contact your
GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check
Control System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
{CAUTION: to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
When you are doing this inspection, the • With a manual transmission, the key should come
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle out only in LOCK.
moves, you or others could be injured.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-11
Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION: With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
When you are doing this check, your vehicle s held by the parking brake only.
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Make sure there is room in front of your
Then release the parking brake followed by the
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to regular brake.
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move. Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-12
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Parking Brake U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part 88901242) or lubricant meeting
number or specification may be obtained from your Cable Guides requirements of NLGI #2,
dealer. Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Power Steering GM

(GM
Power Steering Fluid
Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System in Canada 89021186).
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute Automatic DEXRON®-III Automatic
Certified for Gasoline Engines Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Engine Oil starburst symbol. To determine the Manual Transmission Fluid
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Manual (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
engine, see Engine Oil on Transmission in Canada 89021807).
page 5-13.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Hydraulic (GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant. Clutch System in Canada 10953517) or equivalent
See Engine Coolant DOT-3 brake fluid.
on page 5-25.
Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Cylinders in Canada 10953474).
Windshield ®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Washer Solvent.
6-13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. Hood Latch
Chassis U.S. 12377985, in Canada Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Lubrication 88901242) or lubricant meeting Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
requirements of NLGI #2, Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Category LB or GC-LB. Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Release Pawl
Front and Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
Rear Axle 12378261, in Canada 10953455) Hood and Door
meeting GM Specification 9986115. Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12345349, Hinge and Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
in Canada 10953465). Linkage, 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Folding Seats
Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. and Fuel
Center Spline U.S. 12377985, in Canada Door Hinge
and Universal 88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Outer Tailgate
Joints Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Handle Pivot Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
Points and 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. Hinges
Constant U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Velocity 88901242) or lubricant meeting Dielectric Silicone Grease
Universal Joint requirements of NLGI #2, Weatherstrip (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Category LB or GC-LB. Conditioning in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Synthetic Grease with Teflon,

Squeaks Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
6-14
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number
Transmission Filter Kit 24225323 —

Automatic
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15202408 —
Engine Oil Filter

2.8 L Engine 88984215 PF46
3.5 L Engine 89017342 PF61
Fuel Filter 25121468 GF580
Spark Plugs 25337472 41-981
Windshield Wiper Blades GM Part Number

Driver’s Side 15169017
Passenger’s Side 15169018
Wiper Blade Length – Driver’s 22 inches (55 cm)
Wiper Blade Length – Passenger’s 19 inches (48 cm)
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
6-18
Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3 United States Government ..........................7-11
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4 Canadian Government ................................7-11
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Program for Persons General Motors .........................................7-12
with Disabilities ...........................................7-5 Service Publications Ordering
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6 Information ...............................................7-12
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ..........................................7-9
7-1
Customer Assistance and We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
Information the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure • Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from

the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to top left of the instrument panel and visible through
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns the windshield.)
with the sales transaction or the operation of your • Dealership name and location
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of have a concern.
dealership management. Normally, concerns can STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has are committed to making sure you are completely
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
the general manager. outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
management, it appears your concern cannot be rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Plan (CAMVAP).
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Online Owner Center
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to all in one place.
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
The Owner Center allows you to:
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within • Get e-mail service reminders.
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in • Access information about your specific vehicle,
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
including tips and videos and an electronic
venue for relief available to you.
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following maintenance schedule.
address:
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. • Receive special promotions and privileges only
4200 Wilson Boulevard available to members. (United States only)
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804 Refer to the web for updated information.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
This program is available in all 50 states and the www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text 1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Telephone (TTY) Users Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate Fax Number: 313-381-0022
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
Canada – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes General Motors of Canada Limited
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States – Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
Chevrolet Motor Division
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance GM Mobility Program for Persons
Please contact the local General Motors with Disabilities
Business Unit.
This program, available to
Mexico, Central America and qualified applicants, can
Caribbean Islands/Countries reimburse you up to $1,000
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
Islands) – Customer Assistance adaptive equipment you
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. may require for your vehicle
Customer Assistance Center (hand controls, wheelchair/
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 scooter lifts, etc.).
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for a
limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/
lease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the GM Mobility
Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program • Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
Security While You Travel accident. Assistance when the vehicle is mired in
sand, mud or snow.
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
Assistance program. This value-added service is by a warrantable failure.)
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside • Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who • Dealer Locator Service
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
We will provide the following services during the under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
to you: Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel obligations you might incur.
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
nearest service station. provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will • Your name, home address, and home telephone
be covered at no charge if you are unable to number
gain entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the • Telephone number of your location
replacement key will be covered within 10 miles. • Location of the vehicle
7-6
• Model, year, color, and license plate number Courtesy Transportation
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in its
date of the vehicle offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
• Description of the problem experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to
offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our program for new vehicles.
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away. The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
(1-800-234-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
call 1-888-889-2438. Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Chevrolet’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency Plan Ahead When Possible
or type of occurrence. When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. By scheduling a service appointment and advising
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or your service consultant of your transportation needs,
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
time without notification. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
Canadian Roadside Assistance scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere them know this, and ask for instructions.
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book. off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30.00
your dealer can offer you one of the following: a day and must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
Shuttle Service state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
your daily schedule. This includes a one way or round trip
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles from the
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the
dealership.
repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
Reimbursement a courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Additional Program Information Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Courtesy Transportation is available during the Data Recorders
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
provides detailed warranty coverage information. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating to monitor conditions for air bag deployment and, if so
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
contact you dealer for specific information about Some information may be stored during regular
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during event by computer systems commonly called event data
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General recorders (EDR).
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
alternative transportation may be available under the as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your vehicle may record information about the condition
your dealer for details. of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as engine
speed, brake applications, throttle position, vehicle
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air bag
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
performance data, and the severity of a collision.
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
This information has been used to improve vehicle In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
crash performance and may be used to improve crash • use the data for GM research needs,
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these • make it available for research where appropriate
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
conversation of vehicle occupants. shown, or
To read this information, special equipment is needed • share summary data which is not tied to a specific
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required. vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
GM will not access information about a crash event or purposes.
share it with others other than
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the the special equipment that can read the information
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
• in response to an official request of police or similar If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
government office, the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the collection.
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to the NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
United States Government Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which vehicle safety from the hotline.
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition Reporting Safety Defects to the
to notifying General Motors. Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
General Motors. Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to Service Publications Ordering
General Motors Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) Service Manuals
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write: Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Chevrolet Motor Division information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
P.O. Box 33170 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: Case Unit Repair Manual
General Motors of Canada Limited This manual provides information on unit repair service
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
1908 Colonel Sam Drive transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-12
Service Bulletins Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information Service Publications are available for current and
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
your General Motors dealer or by calling Eastern Time
1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
Owner’s Information World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner publications are written specifically for owners Or you can write to:
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include Helm, Incorporated
the Maintenance Schedule for all models. P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
and Warranty Booklet.
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-71
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-6
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .......................... 3-42 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-31
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF ............................... 3-41 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-95
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-98
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-38 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-102
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-95
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-99
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-104 Finish Damage .......................................... 5-101
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-56 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-101
Adjusting the Speakers Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-48, 3-51, 3-60 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-102
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-27 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Air Bag Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-18
Off Light ..................................................... 3-28 Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-27 Assist Handles ............................................... 2-45
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-62 Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-44
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-46
Vehicle ................................................... 1-74 Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-71
Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-71 Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-70
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-68 Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-71
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-74 Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-71
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-68 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-49
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-69 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-58
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-67 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-64 Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9 Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45
AM ............................................................... 3-70 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-70
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-46 Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-70
1
Audio System(s) (cont.) Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Automatic Door Locks ..................................... 3-40 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-53
Automatic Transmission ................................... 2-20 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Fluid .......................................................... 5-19 Running Lamps ........................................ 5-52
Operation ................................................... 2-22 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps ................................................. 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-54
B Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Backing Up .................................................... 4-67
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-68
BATTERY ...................................................... 3-42
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-18 C
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-29 California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Bed Rails ...................................................... 2-45 Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-34 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-15 Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Brake Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-109
Parking ...................................................... 2-31 Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-38, 4-57, 2-11, 2-36
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30 Care of
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-41 Safety Belts ................................................ 5-98
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39 Your CD Player ........................................... 3-71
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-41 Your CDs ................................................... 3-70
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-41 Cargo Lamps ................................................. 3-17
BRAKES ....................................................... 3-42 CD Messages ........................................ 3-57, 3-69
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39 Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....... 1-24
Braking ........................................................... 4-6 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-53
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8 Certification/Tire Label ..................................... 4-53
2
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-72 Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19
CHANGE OIL ................................................. 3-42 Cleaning
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-32 Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-95
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-40 Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-99
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-26 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Checking the Fluid Level .................................. 5-20 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ............................ 5-100
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-99
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-75 Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-96
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-102 Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-98
Child Restraints Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-98
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37 Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-97
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34 Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 2-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers Cleaning the Top of the
for Children (LATCH System) ..................... 1-46 Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-98
Older Children ............................................. 1-31 Cleaning the Windshield and
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Wiper Blades ............................................ 5-100
for the LATCH System ...................... 1-48, 1-51 Cleaning Tires .............................................. 5-101
Securing a Child Restraint in a Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-97
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-51 Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Securing a Child Restraint in the Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22
Center Front Seat Position ........................ 1-53 Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-24
Securing a Child Restraint in the Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-39
Right Front Seat Position .................. 1-54, 1-58 Compass Operation ......................................... 2-39
Top Strap ................................................... 1-42 Compass Variance .......................................... 2-40
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-44 Composite Headlamp System ........................... 5-50
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40 Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-16
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-71 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-32 D
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21 Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-38
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Models with Rear Seats ....................... 1-51, 1-58 Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-21
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11 Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-46
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-37 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-44 Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-47
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-13 Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17
Customer Assistance Information Door
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7 Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Customer Assistance for Text Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 Rear Doors ................................................. 2-11
GM Mobility Program for Persons with DOORS ......................................................... 3-42
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5 Driver
Reporting Safety Defects to Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
General Motors ........................................ 7-12 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-39
Reporting Safety Defects to the DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-39
Canadian Government .............................. 7-11 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41
Reporting Safety Defects to the Driving
United States Government ......................... 7-11 At Night ..................................................... 4-28
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6 City ........................................................... 4-32
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12 Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
4
Driving (cont.) Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2 Programs ................................................... 3-35
Freeway ..................................................... 4-33 ENG (Engine) HOT ......................................... 3-42
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-36 Engine
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-29 Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-38 Battery ....................................................... 5-42
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-23 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-32
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-22 Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-26 Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-21
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-26 Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-32
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-68 Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-18 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-38 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-31 Fan Noise .................................................. 5-36
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-31 Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-19 Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-66 Starting ...................................................... 2-20
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................... 5-106
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16
E Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-16
Electrical System Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-104 Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105 Express Down Windows .................................. 2-14
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-105 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-105 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
5
F Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Fan Knob ...................................................... 3-20 Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Filter Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17 Gage ......................................................... 3-38
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ......... 3-52, 3-61 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Finding a Station ............................ 3-46, 3-50, 3-59 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Finish Care .................................................... 5-99 FUEL CAP ..................................................... 3-43
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-101 Fuses
Five-Speed .................................................... 2-26 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-71 Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-105
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74
FLUID ........................................................... 3-43 G
Fluid Gage
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19 Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-32
Manual Transmission .................................... 5-22 Fuel .......................................................... 3-38
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36 Speedometer .............................................. 3-25
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38 Tachometer ................................................. 3-26
FM ............................................................... 3-70 Gasoline
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Following Distance .......................................... 4-67 Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-28, 5-48 Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-16
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-44 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-44
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49 GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6 GM Oil Life System™ ...................................... 3-40
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
6
H How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...................
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..........
1-16
5-18
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-24
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7 Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-30
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-9
Headlamps .................................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
I
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-52 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-29
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-28
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5 If the Light is Flashing ..................................... 3-34
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-37 If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-34
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-35 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-40
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-36 If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Hitches .......................................................... 4-65 Ice or Snow ................................................ 4-42
Hood If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-58
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Release ..................................................... 5-11 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Horn ............................................................... 3-7 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-64
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Instrument Panel
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-32 Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-34 Overview ..................................................... 3-4
How to Add Fluid .................................... 5-22, 5-23 Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-17
How to Check ................................ 5-20, 5-22, 5-65 Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-25
How to Check Lubricant .......................... 5-47, 5-49
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-37 J
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii Jump Starting ................................................. 5-43
7
K Light (cont.)
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-29
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5 Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30
Keys ............................................................... 2-3 Cruise Control ............................................. 3-37
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-38
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-37
L Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32
Lamps Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36
Exterior ...................................................... 3-14 Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-26
Interior ....................................................... 3-17 Security ..................................................... 3-37
Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-15 Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-30
Language ...................................................... 3-41 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-50
Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-24 Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-16 Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
LATCH System Locks
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-46 Door ........................................................... 2-8
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11
for the LATCH System ...................... 1-48, 1-51 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8 Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Running ..................................................... 2-33 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Light LOW FUEL .................................................... 3-43
Air Bag Off ................................................. 3-28 LOW TRAC (Traction) ..................................... 3-43
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-27 Lumbar
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-31 Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
8
M Map Lamps .................................................... 2-39
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-7
Maintenance Schedule Message
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9 Mexico, Central America and
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9 Caribbean Islands/Countries
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10 (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7 Mirror Operation ............................................. 2-39
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17 Mirrors
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15 and Temperature Display ........................... 2-38
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-38
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13 Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-38
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-42
Using Your ................................................... 6-2 Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-41
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-41
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-69 Mode Buttons ................................................. 3-20
Making Turns ................................................. 4-67 Mode Knob .................................................... 3-20
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32 MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Transmission ....................................... 2-20
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
N
Operation ................................................... 2-26 New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-13 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
9
O P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25 PARK BRK (Brake) ......................................... 3-43
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25 Park (P)
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11 Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
OIL ............................................................... 3-43 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34
Oil Parking
Engine ....................................................... 5-13 Brake ........................................................ 2-31
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35
OIL LIFE ....................................................... 3-43 Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-68
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-31 Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-35
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3 Passing ................................................. 4-12, 4-67
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-43 Passlock® ...................................................... 2-17
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-43 Payload ......................................................... 4-55
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-42 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .................... 4-56
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-43 Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Playing a CD ......................................... 3-55, 3-64
Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-14 Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-65
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-7 Playing the Radio ........................... 3-46, 3-49, 3-58
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22 Power
Outside Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-18
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-42 Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-41 Electrical System ....................................... 5-105
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-41 Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5 Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9 Windows .................................................... 2-14
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii Power and Heated Seat Circuit Breakers .......... 5-105
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-13 Power Steering ................................................ 4-9
10
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-30 Rear Doors .................................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-28
Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-8, 1-10
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25
Q Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-45
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-38
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-38
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
R Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-27 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-52, 3-61 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-45
Radio Messages ..................................... 3-48, 3-55 REDUCED POWER ........................................ 3-44
Radios .......................................................... 3-44 Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-46 Models without Rear Seats .................... 3-28, 1-48,
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-71 1-54, 1-71
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-70 Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-49 Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-58 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-78
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-75
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-54
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45 Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-42
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-70 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ..... 1-75
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-70 Reporting Safety Defects
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-54, 3-63 Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-47 General Motors ........................................... 7-12
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10 United States Government ............................ 7-11
11
Restraint System Check Safety Belts (cont.)
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-75 Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25
Replacing Restraint System Parts Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24
After a Crash .......................................... 1-75 Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30
Restraint Systems Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Checking .................................................... 1-75 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-75 Safety Chains ................................................. 4-65
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-19 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24 Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-17
Roadside Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6 Sealed Beam Headlamps ................................. 5-51
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-42 Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16 Seats
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-36 Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
S Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Safety Belt Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-8, 1-10
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-30 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-26 Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
Safety Belts Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-90
Care of ...................................................... 5-98 Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Passenger Position .................... 1-24 Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-53
Driver Position ............................................ 1-16 Designed for the LATCH System ........... 1-48, 1-51
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16 Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-51
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-15 Right Front Seat Position ...................... 1-54, 1-58
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Security Light ................................................. 3-37
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-28 Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
12
SERV VEH (Service Vehicle) ............................ 3-44 Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-24
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20
Adding Equipment to the Outside Steering .......................................................... 4-9
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-4 Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-10
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Steering Tips ................................................... 4-9
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12 Storage Areas
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-13 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-44
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-12 Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-44
Setting Preset PTYs ................................ 3-53, 3-62 Glove Box .................................................. 2-44
Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-47, 3-50, 3-59 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-45
Setting the Time Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and Tools ....... 5-86
Radios with Radio Data Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-42
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-45 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Radios without Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-45
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......... 3-47, 3-51, 3-60
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-101
T
Shift Speeds .................................................. 2-27 Tachometer .................................................... 3-26
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-32 Tailgate ......................................................... 2-11
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-34 Taillamps
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-18 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-53
Skidding ........................................................ 4-13 Temperature Display Operation ......................... 2-41
Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 2-15 Temperature Knob ........................................... 3-20
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-31 Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-17
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-94 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-70
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-97 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-109 Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25 Passlock® ................................................... 2-17
13
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7 Traction
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-58 Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-61 TRACTION FAULT .......................................... 3-44
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-62 Trailer
Tires ............................................................. 5-57 Recommendations ....................................... 4-56
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68 Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-66
Chains ....................................................... 5-72 Transfer Case ................................................ 5-48
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74 Transmission
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73 Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64 Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-22
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65 Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-30
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-94 Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-22
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-69 Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-26
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-70 Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70 Unit Repair Manual ...................................... 7-12
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67 Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive) ........... 3-44 Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-16
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22 Trip Information .............................................. 3-39
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-42 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-44 Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 4-56
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-34 Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-65 TURN SIGNAL ............................................... 3-44
Towing Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-45 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-67
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-57 Two-Tiered Loading ......................................... 4-55
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-45
14
U W
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-70 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-69 Warnings
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41
Up-Shift Light ......................................... 2-27, 3-30 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-71 Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-7
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-96 Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-67 Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-43 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-99
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-58
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-64
V Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Vehicle Carrying Hitches .......................................... 4-65
Control ........................................................ 4-5 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv What to Add .................................................. 5-40
Loading ...................................................... 4-50 What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
Parking Your ............................................... 2-35 What to Use .................. 5-26, 5-37, 5-38, 5-47, 5-49
Symbols ......................................................... iv Wheels
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-70
Data Recorders ............................................. 7-9 Replacement ............................................... 5-70
Vehicle Identification When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-104 When to Change Engine Oil
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-104 (GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-16
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-42 When to Check ...................................... 5-22, 5-65
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22 When to Check and Change ............................ 5-19
Visors ........................................................... 2-15 When to Check and Change Lubricant ....... 5-47, 5-49
15
When to Check and What to Use ..................... 5-24 Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-37 Fluid .......................................................... 5-38
When You Are Ready to Leave After Windshield Wiper
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-69 Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-55
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ........ 5-18 Fuses ...................................................... 5-105
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40 Windshield Wipers .......................................... 3-10
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-12 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-38
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-14
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Manual ......................................................
Power ........................................................
2-13
2-14
Y
Sliding Rear ................................................ 2-15 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
16

2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,

Litho in U.S.A. © Copyright General Motors Corporation 10/06/03

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat

This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and

To return the seatback to the upright position, do the

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

When you sit in the center front seating position, you

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Safety Belt Extender

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a

Anchor points for the top strap in a regular or

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

Securing a Child Restraint in the

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,

This part explains the air bag systems. {CAUTION:

The system checks the air bag electrical system for

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

Press the unlock button again within three seconds and

(Crew Cab) 1. Open one of the rear doors.

Leaving Your Vehicle

Rear Doors (Extended Cab)

Tailgate Partially Down

Express Down Windows

If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive

4m(4HI): This setting engages your front axle to help

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

• Pull the lever toward you.

Manual Rearview Mirror with Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone

Cleaning the Mirror

Outside Convex Mirror

• Remote Door Unlock OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Manual transmission shown, automatic transmission similar

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

When the high beams

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the

9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

The cruise symbol on